![Manual de Serviço XL-200 With ISE [PDF]](https://pdfs.asia/img/200x200/manual-de-servio-xl-200-with-ise.jpg)
7 0 12 MB
Manual de Serviço Editado por Reynaldo
For Automated Clinical Chemistry Analyzer
Document Version: 2013.01 Last Updated: April 01, 2013
Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GMBH, Mallaustrasse 69 - 73, 68219 Mannheim, Germany
Service Manual
XL-200
Foreword This manual is organized in a progressive sequence for easy study and reference. It is an instructional aide to provide a reference for easy servicing and maintenance of the analyzer. It contains detailed description of the analyzer features, technical specifications, software installation procedure, PCB layouts, wiring diagrams, troubleshooting and replacement procedures. Use of this manual along with proper training will ensure better serviceability, maintenance and trouble free analyzer operation with optimum performance. Before servicing the analyzer, service engineer should: 1. Read and understand this manual. 2. Be trained by authorized person. 3. Be familiar with the operation of the analyzer
NOTE: Keep this manual in an easily accessible place.
II
Service Manual
XL-200
Legal Information All rights are reserved by manufacturer of this product. Manufacturer is the copyright owner of this document. The contents of this document are subject to change without prior notice and without legal obligation. This document and the information herein are provided for the sole use of the intended recipient(s) and for information purposes only. This document contains contents which are the confidential and proprietary information of the manufacturer. This document can not be modified, reproduced, translated or transmitted in any form or by any means for any purpose, without prior written permission from the manufacturer. No part of this document can be copied or reprinted, in whole or in part, without prior written permission from the manufacturer.
III
Service Manual
XL-200
Contents 1. Safety .........................................................................................................................1-1 1.1. Safety Instructions ............................................................................................... 1-1 1.2. Warning Labels.................................................................................................... 1-2 2. Installation Conditions..............................................................................................2-1 3. Introduction ...............................................................................................................3-1 3.1. Introduction.......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.1. Operating Principle..................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2. Principles of Absorption Photometry .......................................................................... 3-2 3.1.3. Sequence of Operation .............................................................................................. 3-4 3.1.4. Measurement Operation Table................................................................................... 3-5
4. Technical Specifications...........................................................................................4-1 4.1. General Specifications......................................................................................... 4-1 4.2. Installation Conditions.......................................................................................... 4-2 4.3. Sampling Unit ...................................................................................................... 4-2 4.4. Reagent Unit........................................................................................................ 4-3 4.5. Reaction Unit ....................................................................................................... 4-4 4.6. Optical Absorption Measurement Unit ................................................................. 4-5 4.7. Data Processing Unit ........................................................................................... 4-5 4.8. Computer Specifications...................................................................................... 4-6 4.9. Ion Selective Electrode (ISE) Unit (optional)........................................................ 4-7 5. Pre-installation Requirements..................................................................................5-1 5.1. Site Requirement ................................................................................................. 5-1 5.1.1. Enviormental Requirments......................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2. Extrenal Interferences ................................................................................................ 5-1 5.1.3. Verifying Proper Room Lightining............................................................................... 5-2
5.2. Electrical Requirements....................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.1. Voltage and Frequency .............................................................................................. 5-2 5.2.2. Grounding................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.3. Plug Points ................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.3. Analyzer View and Dimensions ........................................................................... 5-3 5.3.1. Front View .................................................................................................................. 5-3 5.3.2. Right Side View.......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.4. Floor Requirements ............................................................................................. 5-5 6. Installation .................................................................................................................6-1 6.1. Basic Operational Information.............................................................................. 6-1 6.2. Unpacking the Analyzer....................................................................................... 6-2 6.3. Inspection and Accessories Checklist.................................................................. 6-3 6.4. Installing the Components of the Analyzer........................................................... 6-6 6.4.1. Installing the Sample Tray and the Reagent Tray...................................................... 6-6 6.4.2. Installing DI Water, Cleaning, Bio-hazardous and Waste Cans ................................. 6-8 6.4.3. Connecting communication cable between Computer and Analyzer ....................... 6-11 6.4.4. Connecting Computer Peripheral Devices ............................................................... 6-11
6.5. Equipment Startup Procedure............................................................................ 6-12 6.6. Software Installation Procedure......................................................................... 6-13
IV
Service Manual
XL-200
6.6.1. Overview .................................................................................................................. 6-13 6.6.2. Pre-requisite............................................................................................................. 6-13 6.6.3. Installing MultiXL Software....................................................................................... 6-26 6.6.4. Upgrading MultiXL Software..................................................................................... 6-42 6.6.5. Database Utility Options........................................................................................... 6-47 6.6.6. Accessing MultiXL Software..................................................................................... 6-57 6.6.7. Password Recovery Procedure................................................................................ 6-59 6.6.8. Steps Performed by the Service Engineer ............................................................... 6-60
6.7. Main Menu Software Layout .............................................................................. 6-61 6.8. Display Language Settings ................................................................................ 6-64 7. Relocation..................................................................................................................7-1 7.1. Tools and Materials Required for Packing the Analyzer ...................................... 7-1 7.2. Uninstalling and De-contaminating the System ................................................... 7-1 7.3. Packing the Analyzer ........................................................................................... 7-4 7.4. Decontamination Certificate................................................................................. 7-5 8. Functional Description .............................................................................................8-1 8.1. Equipment Overview............................................................................................ 8-1 8.1.1. Identification of the Main Components....................................................................... 8-1
8.2. Functionality of Each Unit .................................................................................... 8-3 8.2.1. Auto Sampler Unit (ASP)............................................................................................ 8-3
8.3. Sample and Reagent Pipette Unit........................................................................ 8-5 8.3.1. Liquid Level Sensor (LLS).......................................................................................... 8-5 8.3.2. Probe Down Limit Sensor........................................................................................... 8-5 8.3.3. SRPT Washing Station............................................................................................... 8-5 8.3.4. Sample Barcode Reader............................................................................................ 8-6
8.4. Reagent Tray (RGT) ............................................................................................ 8-6 8.4.1. Type of Reagent Bottles............................................................................................. 8-7 8.4.2. Reagent Bar Code Reader......................................................................................... 8-8 8.4.3. RGT Cooling Unit ....................................................................................................... 8-8
8.5. Reaction Tray (RCT)............................................................................................ 8-9 8.6. Pipette Pump Assembly..................................................................................... 8-10 8.7. Mixing Stirrer Unit .............................................................................................. 8-10 8.8. Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU)............................................................................... 8-11 8.9. Photometer Unit................................................................................................. 8-12 8.10. Liquid Level Sensing for Cans ......................................................................... 8-14 8.11. Ion Selective Electrode Unit (ISE) 4-Channel .................................................. 8-14 9. Electronic Circuit Description..................................................................................9-1 9.1. CPU Board: ELS62012/R4 .................................................................................. 9-1 9.2. Interface Board: ELS62009/R7.1 ......................................................................... 9-9 9.3. Photometer Diode PCB – ELS62014R2 ............................................................ 9-13 9.4. Photometer Signal Processor PCB ELS62013R3.............................................. 9-14 9.5. Opto PCB: ELS22006/R3 .................................................................................. 9-17 9.6. Liquid Level Sensing PCB Assy ELS62026R1 / ELS52010R4 .......................... 9-18 9.7. Liquid Level Sensing PCB Assy: ELS22036R2.1 .............................................. 9-20 9.8. Power Supply Board – ELS62011R3................................................................. 9-21 9.9. LLC Junction Board: ELS62006/R2 ................................................................... 9-23 9.10. USB Connector ELLC2003R4 ......................................................................... 9-24 9.11. Front Panel Indicator ELD52003R2 ................................................................. 9-26
V
Service Manual
XL-200
9.12. Sleep Mode PCB Assembly – ELS62033R1.................................................... 9-27 10. Electrical Wiring Description................................................................................10-1 10.1. WDS6001 Mains Input/Power Supply Distribution ........................................... 10-2 10.2. WDS6002 5V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram......................................................... 10-3 10.3. WDS6003 12V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram without Sleep Mode....................... 10-4 10.4. WDS6024 : Wiring Diagram- With Sleep Mode – Mains Input 220V AC......... 10-5 10.5. WDS6024 : Wiring Diagram- With Sleep Mode – Mains Input 110V AC......... 10-6 10.6. WDS6004 24V/1.1A SMPS Wiring Diagram.................................................... 10-7 10.7. WDS6005 12V/20A SMPS Wiring Diagram..................................................... 10-8 10.8. WDS6006 24V/6.3A SMPS Wiring Diagram.................................................... 10-9 10.9. WDS6007 Interface R7 Board Wiring Diagram.............................................. 10-10 10.10. WDS6007 Interface R7.1 Board Wiring Diagram......................................... 10-11 10.11. WDS6008 Power Supply PCB Wiring Diagram ........................................... 10-12 10.12. WDS6009 RGT Temperature Controller Unit Assembly .............................. 10-13 10.13. WDS6010 Arm OPTO and LLS Signal Wiring Diagram............................... 10-14 10.14. WDS6012 RCT Sensor Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 10-15 10.15. WDS6013 Transformer 220V AC Wiring Diagram ....................................... 10-16 10.16. WDS6014 LLC Junction PCB Wiring Diagram............................................. 10-17 10.17. WDS6018 Transformer 110VAC Wiring Diagram ........................................ 10-18 10.18. WDS6020 Wiring Diagram – CPU PCB to USB PCB ................................ 10-19 10.19. WDS5057: 4 Channel ISE Module Wiring Assembly ................................... 10-20 10.20. WDS6021 110V Terminal Block Wiring Diagram......................................... 10-22 10.21. WDS6022 Arm Assembly Wiring Diagram with LLS PCB ELS62026/R1..... 10-23 10.22. WDS6022 Arm Assembly Wiring Diagram – With LLS PCB ELS22036R2.110-24 10.23. WDS6024 Wiring Diagram – Sleep Mode PCB ELS62033R1: Mains Input 220V AC........................................................................................................................... 10-25 10.24. WDS6024 Wiring Diagram – Sleep Mode PCB ELS62033R1: Mains Input 110V AC........................................................................................................................... 10-26 10.25. Wiring Diagram Of Canmax Barcode Scanner ............................................ 10-27 10.26. Inter Connection Wiring Diagram of XL-200 - Mains Input 220VAC ........... 10-28 10.27. Inter Connection Wiring Diagram of XL-200 - Mains Input 110VAC ........... 10-29 10.28. Electrical Assembly of Sapphire Syringe ..................................................... 10-30 10.29. Electrical Assembly of TX2 -110V MAINS WIRING ..................................... 10-31 10.30. Electrical Assembly Of Stepper Motor ......................................................... 10-32 10.31. EAS6011 RGT Duct Electrical Assembly..................................................... 10-33 10.32. EAS6016 RCT Slip Ring Electrical Assembly .............................................. 10-34 10.1. EAS6003 Stirrer Motor Electrical Assembly................................................... 10-35 11. Mechanical Description ........................................................................................11-1 11.1. Sample and Reagent Arm Unit ........................................................................ 11-1 11.2. Sample/Reagent Dilutor Assembly .................................................................. 11-2 11.3. CRU Assembly ................................................................................................ 11-3 11.4. Stirrer (STR) Assembly.................................................................................... 11-5 11.5. Sample Transport Assembly (ASP) ................................................................. 11-6 11.6. Reagent Transport (RGT) Assembly ............................................................... 11-8 11.7. Reaction Cuvette (RCT) Assembly .................................................................. 11-9 11.8. Pressure Tank Assembly............................................................................... 11-11
VI
Service Manual
XL-200
12. Hydraulic Description ...........................................................................................12-1 12.1. Hydraulic Section............................................................................................. 12-1 12.2. Hydraulic System Operation ............................................................................ 12-2 12.2.1. Valves and Pump Functions................................................................................... 12-2
12.3. Hydraulic Connection Diagram ........................................................................ 12-3 12.4. Cuvette Rinsing Unit ........................................................................................ 12-3 13. Maintenance...........................................................................................................13-1 13.1. Maintenance Intervals...................................................................................... 13-1 13.1.1. Daily Maintenance.................................................................................................. 13-2 13.1.2. Weekly Maintenance.............................................................................................. 13-2 13.1.3. Quarterly Maintenance........................................................................................... 13-3 13.1.4. Annual Maintenance............................................................................................... 13-3
13.2. Replacement Schedule for Spares and Consumable ...................................... 13-5 13.3. Preventative Maintenance ............................................................................... 13-5 13.3.1. Actions Taken in the Event of Trouble ................................................................... 13-5 13.3.2. Equipment Malfunction........................................................................................... 13-9 13.3.3. Maintenance Menu............................................................................................... 13-50
14. Introduction to ISE Module...................................................................................14-1 14.1. Four Channel ISE Module Mechanical ............................................................ 14-2 14.2. ISE Technical Specification ............................................................................. 14-5 14.2.1. Four Channel ISE................................................................................................... 14-5
14.3. ISE Measurement Theory................................................................................ 14-6 14.4. Electrodes and Reagents Used ....................................................................... 14-7 14.5. Urine ISE Dilution Rerun.................................................................................. 14-8 14.6. Storage and Usage of the Reagents................................................................ 14-8 14.7. Turning Off the Power...................................................................................... 14-9 14.8. Shutdown Procedure ....................................................................................... 14-9 14.8.1. Preparing the ISE Module for Storage ................................................................... 14-9 14.8.2. Reference, Na+ and Cl- Electrodes......................................................................... 14-9 14.8.3. K+ and Li+ Electrode ............................................................................................... 14-9 14.8.4. Reagent Pack......................................................................................................... 14-9 14.8.5. Analyzer Tubing ................................................................................................... 14-10 14.8.6. Analyzer Re-activation ......................................................................................... 14-10
14.9. ISE Calibration............................................................................................... 14-10 14.9.1. Procedure for ISE Calibration............................................................................... 14-10
14.10. Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................ 14-12 14.11. Acceptable Calibration Ranges.................................................................... 14-13 14.12. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 14-13 14.13. Procedure for Installing New Reagent Pack ................................................ 14-16 14.13.1. Pre-requisite....................................................................................................... 14-16 14.13.2. Procedure........................................................................................................... 14-16
14.14. Error Codes ................................................................................................. 14-18 14.15. Error Message for ISE Unit.......................................................................... 14-18 15. Firmware Programming Procedure .....................................................................15-1 15.1. Programming XL-200 CPU Board.................................................................... 15-1 15.2. Programming PDC and RCT Heater................................................................ 15-6
VII
Service Manual
XL-200
16. Pressure Settings..................................................................................................16-1 16.1. Digital Pressure Indicator................................................................................. 16-1 16.2. Access for Different Settings............................................................................ 16-1 16.3. HI/LO Pressure Setting Procedure .................................................................. 16-2 16.4. Mode Configuration ......................................................................................... 16-3 16.5. Error Check during Run ................................................................................... 16-4 17. Replacement, Alignment, Calibration, and Verification Procedure ..................17-1 17.1. Replacement Procedure .................................................................................. 17-1 17.1.1. Lamp Replacement Procedure............................................................................... 17-1 17.1.2. Probe Replacement Procedure.............................................................................. 17-4 17.1.3. Probe Alignment..................................................................................................... 17-6
17.2. Calibration Procedure ...................................................................................... 17-8 17.2.1. RCT Temperature Verification................................................................................ 17-8 17.2.2. RGT Temperature Calibration Procedure .............................................................. 17-8 17.2.3. Pressure Tank Temperature Calibration .............................................................. 17-17
17.3. Opto Status.................................................................................................... 17-18 17.3.2. Sample Arm.......................................................................................................... 17-19 17.3.3. Syringe Pump Dilutor ........................................................................................... 17-21 17.3.4. CRU...................................................................................................................... 17-21 17.3.5. Stirrer.................................................................................................................... 17-21 17.3.6. Sample Tray......................................................................................................... 17-22 17.3.7. Reagent Tray........................................................................................................ 17-22 17.3.8. Reaction Tray (RCT) ............................................................................................ 17-23 17.3.9. PC Communication .............................................................................................. 17-24
17.4. Adjustment and Verification Procedure.......................................................... 17-24 17.4.1. Pressure Tank Pressure Adjustment Procedure.................................................. 17-24 17.4.2. Syringe Valve Verification Procedure................................................................... 17-25 17.4.3. Laundry Flow Adjustment Procedure ................................................................... 17-25 17.4.4. Arm Probe Internal Cleaning Flow Verification..................................................... 17-26 17.4.5. Service Check Screen.......................................................................................... 17-26 17.4.6. Photometer Verification Procedure ...................................................................... 17-35 17.4.7. Procedure to Remove Air Bubbles from Syringe.................................................. 17-35
17.5. Temperature Verification Procedure .............................................................. 17-40 17.5.1. Reagent Temperature Verification Procedure...................................................... 17-40 17.5.2. Reaction Temperature Verification Procedure ..................................................... 17-41
17.6. Analytical Check Procedure........................................................................... 17-41 17.6.1. Absorbance Test Procedure (optional)................................................................. 17-41 17.6.2. Preparation of Solution A ..................................................................................... 17-41 17.6.3. Preparation of Solution B ..................................................................................... 17-41 17.6.4. Method ................................................................................................................. 17-41
18. Miscellaneous........................................................................................................18-1 18.1. Fuse Ratings.................................................................................................... 18-1 18.2. Transformer, SMPS Details ............................................................................. 18-2 19. Accessories, Spares, and Consumable List .......................................................19-1 19.1. Spares Parts List ............................................................................................. 19-1 20. Appendix................................................................................................................20-1 20.1. TBM Image Installation for Windows Embedded 7 .......................................... 20-1 20.1.1. Scenario ................................................................................................................. 20-1
VIII
Service Manual
XL-200
20.1.2. Installing TBM Image into Analyzer PC.................................................................. 20-1 20.1.3. Identifying Various Drives....................................................................................... 20-6
20.2. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 20-9 20.2.1. SQL Server 2005 Configuration ........................................................................... 20-10
21. Revision History....................................................................................................21-1
IX
Service Manual
XL-200
Document Conventions Before reading the manual, please get familiarized with the following icons used in this manual Icons Warning About
Bio-hazard
Electric Shock
High Temperature
Injury
Warnings and Caution
Notes, Usage, Tips, and Additional information
X
Service Manual
XL-200
1. Safety This chapter provides the user with necessary information on the warning labels. The user is requested to read before installation of the analyzer.
1.1. Safety Instructions During operation, do not touch auto reagent and sample container unit, SRPT probe and any other moving mechanical parts in the analyzer. During operation, shut cover all the time. Never touch patients' samples, SRPT probe, reaction cells with bare hands to prevent operator from possible infection. Wear medical rubber gloves to keep skin from direct contact with patients' samples. Give special consideration to keep skin and mucous membrane from contact with reagents to prevent operator from possible infection. Wear medical rubber gloves, goggles, etc. to keep skin and mucous membrane from contact with reagents. The contact with the wastes such as used reaction cells and solutions may cause infection. Handle them with gloved hands without exception. Follow the national or local laws and rules when they are thrown out. There are two kinds of liquid wastes drained from this analyzer, i.e. high- and lowconcentrated wastes. The access to the conductive parts within the analyzer may cause serious electric shock. When removing parts, make sure to shut off the power supply. Leave any maintenance and repair of electrical parts inside the equipment to qualified service personnel. Never leave reagent bottles on the working table (upper surface inside the analyzer). Careless handling of reagent bottles may cause tumble and leak. Read the statements of virtues that came with reagents prior to their use. Do not make a modification to the analyzer. The photo meter unit uses halogen lamp (20W) which produces high temperature. Direct contact with this part may cause severe burns. Always replace the halogen lamp with new one after a lapse of 30 minutes since the power switch of the analyzer is turned off to avoid danger of burns.
1-1
Service Manual
XL-200
1.2. Warning Labels Icons
Warning About Bio-hazard
Electric Shock
High Temperature
Injury
Action to be taken as directed by the operator manual
Notes, Usage, Tips, and Additional information
1-2
Service Manual
XL-200
The following warning labels are affixed on the places that are the potentially hazardous.
WARNING ABOUT
LOCATION
WARNING POTENTIAL HAND EXPOSURE TO PROBE. KEEP HANDS AWAY.
On the 4-piece Top Cover Plates
WARNING ABOUT
LOCATION
CAUTION
On the 4-piece Top Cover Plates
DO NOT OPERATE MACHINE WITH COVER OPEN DO NOT TOUCH MOVING PARTS WHEN IN OPERATIONPERSONNEL INJURY MAY RESULT DUE TO PROBE ARM MOVEMENT TO REDUCE DAMAGE TO THE INSTRUMENT, DO NOT SPILL SAMPLE OR REAGENT ON THE MACHINE
1-3
Service Manual
XL-200
WARNING ABOUT
LOCATION
WASTE
On Waste Can (20 liter)
WARNING ABOUT
LOCATION
CLEANING SOLUTION
On Cleaning Solution Can (10 liter)
WARNING ABOUT
PLACES
DI WATER
On DI Water Can (20 liter)
1-4
Service Manual
XL-200
2. Installation Conditions The user is requested to read this instruction before he/she uses the analyzer for the first time and becomes acquainted with how to operate the analyzer. Only qualified personnel should use the analyzer. 1. When the analyzer is installed, the following precautions should be taken: a. Keep the analyzer out of the rain and any other water splash. b. Avoid areas that are adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust, air containing salt or sulfur, etc. c. Pay attention to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock during transportation), etc. d. Do not install the analyzer at the place adjacent to the storage room of chemicals or the place where any gas is likely to be generated. e. Pay attention to frequency, voltage and permissible current (or power consumption). f. Connect the analyzer to the operational computer using accompanying USB cable. g. When the other cable is used, this may cause the analyzer to suffer from disturbing noise, exert an adverse effect on its surroundings or get incorrect measurement results. 2. Before operating the analyzer, you must follow the necessary instructions: a. Check the power supply frequency, voltage and current capacity (power consumption). b. Ensure that the analyzer is correctly and well grounded. c. Ensure that all the necessary electrical cables are correctly connected. d. Check that the contact conditions of switches and indicators are appropriate and that the analyzer is ready to be activated correctly. Extreme care must be taken not to result in misdiagnosis or pose any danger to the analyzer or human body when the analyzer in conjunction with other equipment. e. Wipe the probe tip of SRPT several times with cloth or alike with rubbing alcohol before the analyzer is used. At this time, do not forget to put medical rubber gloves or alike on. Pay attention to prevent bare skins of hands or arms from being touched by or pricked with the probe tip. 3. The caution should always be exercised when replacing the halogen lamp.
2-1
Service Manual
XL-200
a. Replace the halogen lamp by a new one after a lapse of 30 minutes after the analyzer is turned off, to avoid the danger of burns. Keep hands away from the glass part of the new halogen lamp. Make sure that there is no crack or breakage in the glass part. 4. The following cautions should be exercised during the operation of analyzer: a. Pay attention not to exceed the time and volume necessary for diagnosis. b. Keep monitoring the behavior of the whole system in order to detect any malfunction. c. Take immediate corrective measures including shutdown of operation when any malfunction is detected in the analyzer. d. Avoid possibilities of any direct access by the patients. 5. The following cautions should be exercised after the use of the analyzer: a. Turn off the power after every operation so that control is restored to its previous state as directed. b. Do not remove the line cord plugs from receptacles by pulling the cords so that no undue stress is developed in the cords. c. If the auto maintenance at shutdown is not performed wwipe the probe tips of SRPT several times with cloth or alike with rubbing alcohol before the analyzer is used. At this time, do not forget to put medical rubber gloves or alike on. Pay attention to prevent bare skins of hands or arms from being touched by or pricked with the probe tip. d. Pay attention to the storage area. i) Keep the analyzer out of the rain and any other water splash. ii) Avoid areas that are adversely affected by atmospheric pressure, temperature, humidity, ventilation, sunlight, dust and air containing salt, sulfur, etc. iii) Pay attention to inclination, vibration, shock (including shock during transportation), etc. iv) Avoid areas adjacent to the storage room of chemicals or areas that are likely to generate gasses. Avoid areas that are likely to be subject to inclination, vibration and shock. e. Organize and store parts and cords associated with the analyzer after they have been cleaned. f. Keep the analyzer clean not to avoid any inconvenience for the next use. 6. In the event of trouble, do not fiddle with the analyzer. You must contact the authorized service personnel for troubleshooting. 7. Maintenance and checks.
2-2
Service Manual
XL-200
a. It is important for the analyzer and its associated parts to be periodically checked.
Sample probe
DI water pump
Halogen Lamp
b. Ensure that the analyzer operates normally and correctly, when it is reused after being kept unused for some time. 8. The following cautions should be taken when using and handling the reagents: a. After unpacking the reagents, be sure not to allow dust, dirt or bacteria to come in touch with the reagent. b. Do not use reagents that are out of expiration date. c. Handle a reagent gently to avoid formation of bubbles. d. Take care not to spill the reagent. If it spills, wipe it off immediately using a wet cloth. e. Follow other instructions described in the package insert on each reagent. f. If a reagent happens to enter your eye, wash it off immediately using plenty of water, and take medical treatment at once. g. If you swallow it inadvertently, call for a doctor immediately and drink plenty of water. Warning: Some reagents are strong acids or alkalis. Exercise great care so that your hands and clothing do not come into contact with reagents. If your hands or clothing come into contact with either reagent, immediately wash them off with soap and water. If a reagent comes into contact with your eye(s), immediately rinse with water for at least 15 minutes. 9. Prohibit any alteration and/or modification to the analyzer without permission by manufacturer. 10. The following precautions should be taken for preventing infection due to sample handling: Bio-hazard: Do not touch the samples, mixtures and waste liquids with bare hands. Be sure to wear gloves to protect you from infection. In case any samples come in contact with your skin, thoroughly rinse the area that came in contact with the sample and consult a physician. Immediately wipe off any contaminants from the system.
2-3
Service Manual
XL-200
11. The following precautions should be taken for disposing the bio-hazardous waste: Caution: Treat the drain water as infectious waste. Collect the drain water in reserve can & allow it to be disposed of by expert distributors.
2-4
Service Manual
XL-200
3. Introduction 3.1. Introduction This service manual, imparts a technical understanding of Transasia fully automated XL-200 bench top analyzer. It is meant to compliment the XL-200 Operators Manual. If the reader encounters areas that are not fully explained, please refer to the operator's manual. This manual does not intend to teach troubleshooting skills. It is designed to provide a competent service engineer trained on the XL-200, with the necessary information required to maintain the XL-200 analyzer. Certain sections of this manual are subject to change. Additionally, changes in the components (if any) will be intimated by Engineering Change Record / Technical bulletins to all authorized distributors of XL-200. If you come across any discrepancies or required corrections, we will appreciate your valuable feedback. Optimum performance of the analyzer is guaranteed only by the use of genuine Transasia supplied parts. Transasia will not be responsible for failures associated with the use of unauthorized parts or unauthorized modifications carried out by the distributor or customer.
3.1.1. Operating Principle The XL-200 analyzer is an automated clinical biochemistry analyzer based on the principle of photometry, it measures light transmittance at various wavelengths. White light as we see it is actually composed of several colors. This becomes evident, when we pass a beam of white light through a prism. If the light emerging from the prism on the opposite side were allowed to fall on a screen, we would see a wide spectrum of colors, beginning with red on the top and ending with violet at the bottom. The colors visible in between are in the order of indigo, blue, green, yellow, and orange.
Incident or white light contains the entire spectrum, objects that appear colored, absorb light at a particular wavelength and reflect others, thus giving different colors. That color is a function of its wavelength
3-1
Service Manual
XL-200
Light having a wavelength of less than 400 nm is termed Ultraviolet, whereas light having a wavelength greater than 800 nm is described as Infrared, both ultraviolet and infrared lights are invisible to the human eyes. Light corresponding to wavelengths between 400 nm and 800 nm is visible to the human eye and is termed as Visible light.
3.1.2. Principles of Absorption Photometry Beer’s Law If light is allowed to pass through a colored solution, the solution will absorb some light while the rest of it will be transmitted. The amount of light absorbed is proportional to the nature, concentration and color of the solution. Lambert’s Law The light absorbed by the colored solution is directly proportional to the light path of the color solution (diameter of the cuvette): that is if the cuvette diameter is doubled, the light absorbed will be doubled.
Since the total incident light = light absorbed + light transmitted, it follows that:
Therefore as the absorbed light (Absorbance) increases, the transmitted light will decrease As we increase the concentration of the colored solution, the light absorbed increases, and we find that the transmittance varies inversely and logarithmically with concentration.
3-2
Service Manual
XL-200
Using the above formula, for different Percentage of transmittance we obtain the following Absorbance’s. Percentage Transmittance
Absorbance
100
0.000
50
0.301
25
0.602
12.5
0.903
The study of the correlation between the concentration of a colored liquid the intensity of its color and the amount of light absorbed by the colored solution is termed as Colorimetry. Useful Information: Percent
Absorbance
10
1.000
11
0.959
45
0.347
46
0.337
90
0.046
91
0.041
95
0.022
96
0.018
Absolute Error
Per Cent Relative Error
0.041
4.1
0.001
2.9
0.005
10.9
0.004
8.2
The relative error is minimal at an absorbance of 0.434 (36.8 %T). Consequently, methods should be designed such that readings fall near the center of the scale, preferably within an absorbance of approximately 0.1 and 0.7 (20 and 80%T).
3-3
Service Manual
XL-200
XL-200 Photometer System
3.1.3. Sequence of Operation The instrument works on the principle of light photometry and a combination of robotics and hydraulics that are computer controlled to obtain a high degree of precision and accuracy. The sample under test is pipette into the cuvette along with the reagent; this reaction is then read at defined time interval of 18 seconds to obtain their optical densities. The entire operation can be divided into the following sequence. 1. Getting ready for Sampling 2. Cuvette rinsing (cleaning) 3. Reagent 1 + Sample Addition 4. Stirrer Mixing for R1 + Sample Mixture 5. Reading 6. Reagent 2 Addition (optional) 7. Stirrer Mixing after R2 addition (optional) 8. Reading 9. Reporting 10. Removal/empting of old biohazard reaction waste from the cuvette.
3-4
Service Manual
XL-200
3.1.4. Measurement Operation Table The analyzer records absorbance for a cuvette every 18 seconds over a span of 10 minutes 48 seconds. These readings are used for result calculation. The measurement points are referred to as M1Start, M1End, M2Start and M2End. Time (Minutes)
Cycle Number
Analyzer Action
0.00
0
Dry the cuvette, Add Reagent 1 + Sample
0.18
1
Stir 1 + Measure reaction mixture absorbance
0.36
2
Measure reaction absorbance
0.54
3
Measure reaction absorbance
1.12
4
Measure reaction absorbance
1.30
5
Measure reaction absorbance
1.48
6
Measure reaction absorbance
2.06
7
Measure reaction absorbance
2.24
8
Measure reaction absorbance
2.42
9
Measure reaction absorbance
3.00
10
Measure reaction absorbance
3.18
11
Measure reaction absorbance
3.36
12
Measure reaction absorbance
3.54
13
Measure reaction absorbance
4.12
14
Measure reaction absorbance
4.30
15
Measure reaction absorbance
4.48
16
Measure reaction absorbance
5.06
17
Add Reagent 2 + Stir 2 + Measure reaction absorbance
5.24
18
Measure reaction absorbance
5.42
19
Measure reaction absorbance
6.00
20
Measure reaction absorbance
6.18
21
Measure reaction absorbance
6.36
22
Measure reaction absorbance
6.54
23
Measure reaction absorbance
7.12
24
Measure reaction absorbance
7.30
25
Measure reaction absorbance
7.48
26
Measure reaction absorbance
8.06
27
Measure reaction absorbance
8.24
28
Measure reaction absorbance
8.42
29
Measure reaction absorbance
9.00
30
Measure reaction absorbance
9.18
31
Measure reaction absorbance
9.36
32
Measure reaction absorbance
9.54
33
Measure reaction absorbance
10.12
34
Measure reaction absorbance
3-5
Service Manual
XL-200
10.30
35
Measure reaction absorbance
10.48
36
Measure reaction absorbance + Final result reporting
11.06
37
Empty cuvette contents + Add detergent
11.24
38
Empty cuvette contents + Add DI Water
11.42
39
Empty cuvette contents + Add DI Water
12.00
40
Empty cuvette contents + Add DI Water
12.18
41
Empty cuvette contents + Add DI Water
12.36
42
Empty cuvette contents + Add DI Water
12.54
43
Measure cuvette blank absorbance
13.12
44
Empty cuvette contents
13.30
45
Drying the cuvette
3-6
Service Manual
XL-200
4. Technical Specifications 4.1. General Specifications Item
Description
Throughput
200 tests per hour for a cycle time of 18 seconds (400 tests per hour with ISE).
System type
Discrete, open, automated, random access, patient prioritized, 1/2 Reagent system.
Sample
Serum, Urine, CSF, Plasma, Whole Blood, Others.
Measurement principle
Turbidimetric Immunoassay, Colorimetry (Rate/End Point), Ion Selective Electrodes (optional).
Applicable analytes
Photometric assays: Enzyme, lipid, protein, sugar, nitrides, inorganic substances, complements and others. Turbidimetric assays: IgG, IgA, IgM, C3, C4, RF, CRP, ASO, Transferrin and others Transferrin and others. ISE Potentiometric Assays (Na, K, Cl, (Li optional)
Test method
Absolute measurement, Relative measurement, ISE.
On board Reagent Positions
50 items max (4 out of 50 positions can be used for diluents and wash); 54 test items with ISE.
Programmable parameters
No Limit for Programmed Tests or Calculation Items
Assay modes
1-Point, 2-Point, Rate-A, and Rate-B.
Sample volume
2-70 μl (adjustable in 0.2 μl step).
Reaction volume
180μl to 550μl.
Reaction temperature
37 °C. Temperature stability: ± 0.2 °C.
Reaction time
Depends on the designated cycle time and number of reagents used For 1 step assay (using R1) 648 seconds (10 minutes 48 seconds) for a cycle time of 18 seconds For 2 step assay (using R1 and R2) 1st reaction 306 seconds (5 minutes 6 seconds) + 2nd reaction 324 seconds (5 minutes 24 seconds) for a cycle time of 18 seconds
Test selection
Setting of tests one by one or with profile key for each sample. Group order entry is possible. Setting from host computer via interface (optional). Setting according to bar-code data on sample container.
Maintenance
Programmable maintenance actions: Cuvette Rinse, Water Save, Auto Wash, Probe Wash, Prime Wash, ISE maintenance and Calibration
4-1
Service Manual Barcode identification
XL-200 Sample barcode formats - NW7, code 39, code 128 (A, B, C), 2 of 5 interleaved, UPC A. Reagent barcode formats - 2 of 5 interleaved. During batch run, barcode scan for reagent is performed.
Water supply unit
Water consumption: Less than or equal to 7.5 liters/hour. Manufactures and supplies: Type 2 quality (by NCCLS standards) ion exchange water (optional).
System Warm-up Time
5 minute system warm-up time.
Safety mechanism
Vertical obstruction detection, Capacitance based liquid level sensing.
Noise level
Less than 65 dB with cover closed.
4.2. Installation Conditions Item
Description
Power source/ consumption
AC 220 V ± 10%, 50 ± 1 Hz or AC 110 V ± 10%, 60 ± 1 Hz.
Fuses
5A for 220V and 10A for 110V input supplies
Drainage
Used sample (concentrated waste solution) and washed sample (diluted waste) are to be drained separately.
Ambient temperature
15 – 30 °C.
Power consumption: 600 VA (excluding PC/Printer/Monitor).
Variation during operation: Less than ± 2 °C per hour. Relative humidity
40 – 80% free from water dew formation.
Dimensions
810 mm (W) * 700 mm (D) * 600mm (H).
Weight
Approximately 120 kg.
Operating Pressure
85kPa – 110kPa
4.3. Sampling Unit Item
Description
Sample container
Blood collection tube 10 ml (16 x 100 mm), 7 ml (14.5 x 84 mm), 5 ml (13 x 75 mm). Adaptors will be provided for 5 and 7 ml tubes. 2 ml Sample Cup, 500 µl Micro-cup
Sample placement
Sample tray Outer Most Track: 15 positions for placing barcode tubes. Middle Track: 15 positions for placing barcode tubes. Innermost Track: 9 positions for placing Sample cup and Standard cup without barcode.
STAT samples
Place anywhere on the Sample Tray. STAT samples are measured preferentially. Interrupt permitted even during analysis.
4-2
Service Manual Sampling
XL-200 Pipetting system with plunger, driven by stepper motor. Sample volume: 2-70 µl (adjustable in 0.1 µl step).
Pipetting mode
Discharges set volume of sample into cuvette or the ISE module (optional).
Sampling probe
Micro-pipette with level sensor. Washing solution. Outside: Preheated de-ionized water. Inside: Preheated de-ionized water. Equipped with vertical obstruction detection facility to prevent probe crash.
Sample dilution
Dilution ratio: 2 to 150 times. A cuvette is used as dilution vessel. Set amount of diluents is dispensed into a cuvette by reagent probe and set amount of sample is dispensed into it by sample probe. Dilution possible for repeat run. Direct reduced/increased volume runs are also possible.
Repeat run
Execution by repeat run list or auto execution. Auto execution according to abnormal marking and/or range over. Reduced/increased volume repeat run also possible.
Sample identification
Sample bar-code format - NW7, code 39, code 128 (A,B,C), 2 of 5 interleaved, UPC A and 3-18 digits (depending on the length of the barcode) Position ID for STAT samples
Dead Volume
≤ 450 μl for 10ml Sample Tubes. ≤ 350 μl for 5ml /7ml Sample Tubes. ≤ 100 μl for 2ml Sample Cup. ≤ 100 μl for STD Cup.
4.4. Reagent Unit Item
Description
Type
Turn table type reagent tray.
Reagent tray
Common reagent tray for reagent 1 and reagent 2.
Reagent cooling temperature
8 ± 4 °C cooled with refrigeration unit.
Reagent bottles
25 positions for placing 50 ml bottles 25 positions for placing 20 ml bottles
Reagent dispensing
Pipetting system with plunger, driven by stepping motor. R1 dispensing in the 1st cycle R2 dispensing in the 17th cycle
Reagent volume
Reagent 1: 50 – 300 µl (adjustable in 1 µl step). Reagent 2: 0 or 10 – 200 µl (adjustable in 1 µl step).
Dead volume
≤ 2.0 ml for 50 ml Bottles. ≤ 1.5 ml for 20 ml Bottles. ≤ 0.5ml for 5ml Tube Adapters
4-3
Service Manual Reagent identification
XL-200 Sample bar-code format - ITF. Reagent bar-code ID (18 digit barcode readability).
Residual volume information
Calculated by countdown system as well as measured by capacitance type level sensor and displayed on screen.
Reagent positions
Total 50 positions for accommodating reagent 1 and reagent 2.
Reagent protection
Reagent cover to protect from evaporation, dust, and direct light.
Carry over actions
Provision for extra Reagent Wash, Detergent Wash, System Wash and Cuvette Skipping given for Carry-Over Pairs.
4.5. Reaction Unit Item
Description
Type
Turn table.
Reaction tray
Rotating tray. Number of reaction cuvettes: 45. Temperature control: Turn table direct heating by foil heaters.
Reaction temperature
37 ± 0.2 °C
Cuvettes
Reusable. Number of reaction cuvettes: 45. Dimensions: 5 x 4.9 mm. Optical path length: 5 mm (factor to be fed for 10 mm). Material: Hard glass. Volume: 700 µl. Reaction liquid volume: 550 µl maximum, 180 µl minimum.
Reaction liquid mixing
Type: Immersion mixing by rotating mixers. Stirrer mixer (3 variable mixing speeds). Mixing positions. The 1st position: Right after sample dispense into the first reagent nd st The 2 position: 1 reagent + sample + R2
Cuvette washing
Type: By the automatic washing system. The reaction waste is aspirated out, then cuvette is washed by washing solution and repeatedly by DI water, finally residual liquid is removed. Number of washing operation steps: 7 steps. Reaction waste removal: 1 step Washing: 5 steps Residual liquid removal: 2 steps Number of washing solution application. Detergent solution: 1 Ion exchange water: 5 Washing solution container. Detergent: 10 liters Capacity Reaction waste is collected into two waste cans (concentrated waste and diluted waste) by pumps. In built cuvette overflow protection.
4-4
Service Manual
XL-200
4.6. Optical Absorption Measurement Unit Item
Description
Type
Multiple Wavelengths, Static Filter.
Photometric system
Multi-wavelength direct measurement of light after penetration into reaction cuvette (transmitted light).
Wavelength
8 Wavelengths: 340 nm, 405 nm, 505 nm, 546 nm, 578 nm, 600nm, 660 nm, and 700 nm.
Wavelength per chemistry
One or two wavelength.
Measurement interval
Total 36 points. Every 18 seconds for 18 second cycle time.
OD range
OD 0 – 2.5. Light path calculated as 10 mm.
Resolution
0.0001 OD
Light source
Pre-aligned Halogen lamp (12V/20W).
Detector
Silicon photo-diode array.
Cell blank correction
Corrected by water blank measured after cuvette washing.
Minimum reaction liquid volume
180 µl.
4.7. Data Processing Unit Item
Description
Calibration curve
K-Factor, Linear (one point, two point and multipoint), Logit-log, Spline, Exponential, Polynomial. Multipoint curves up to 10 points. One point correction to multi-point calibration line is provided. Automatic Dilution Line Created.
Quality control
Within day as well as day-to-day X and X-R control diagram. Mean, SD, %CV, R are calculated for the each chemistry. QC graph based on west gard QC rules
Repeat run
Execution by repeat run list or auto execution. Auto execution according to abnormal marking or range over. Reduced/increased volume repeat run also possible.
Monitor function
Reaction curve, Calibration curve, Status of sample operation and Reagent level in bottles can be viewed graphically.
Calculation between items
Correlation correction factor (Y = aX + b). Calculation by the formula defined by user. No Limit for Programming Calculation Items. Each calculation item can include up to 5 chemistries. Recalculation of results possible after modification in Calibration Parameters or Test Parameters.
Report/list format
Report generation: Patient wise, Test wise, Date wise, Location wise, Abnormal result wise, Doctor name wise, Batch wise. Lists: Abnormal values list, Pending run list, Repeat run list.
4-5
Service Manual
XL-200
Backup
Partial backup of selective data such as Consumables, Patient, Patient with Results, Test Parameters, Calibration, Error Log, and System parameters Is possible in the Text, XML, XLS and CSV formats. Full Backup.
Special treatment
Reagent blank correction.
Data check
Reference range check by age, sex, sample type. Panic limit check. Reaction linearity check. Reaction mixture absorbance checks. Antigen excess/prozone check (by reaction time course analysis method).
Alarms and notices
Types of alarms: Erroneous operation, mechanical malfunction of analyzer, data processor hardware error, erroneous test results. Alarm level: Notice, temporary halt of analysis, suspension of analysis, system stop. Prompts on display alarms.
Diagnostic checks
Mechanical movements and functional performance can be checked through diagnostic menu.
Password
Different user ID with password to login into the application. Access Control for Menu options can be defined by Administrator.
4.8. Computer Specifications The minimum specification for the system is shown in the table below. However, you are recommended to use the most powerful system available to you. Item
Description
User interface hardware
Processor: Pentium IV, 2.8 GHz or above. Operating System: Windows XP Professional English (32-bit) Service Pack 2/3 or Windows 7 Professional English Edition (32-bit). RAM: 1 GB or above for Windows XP and 2 GB or above for Windows 7. Hard Disk: 80 GB or above. Monitor: 17 inch / 19 inch Color Monitor supporting 1024 * 768 resolution. External Drives: CD-ROM drive. Printer: DeskJet, LaserJet.
System interface
Analyzer – PC: USB bi-directional USB connectivity through USB
NOTE: The specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
4-6
Service Manual
XL-200
4.9. Ion Selective Electrode (ISE) Unit (optional) Item
Description
Type of
Ion selective electrode.
measurement
Direct measurement for Serum samples. Urine sample to be diluted with urine diluent (on board, on Reagent Tray).
Sample types
Serum, Urine (urine diluted 10 times on board for first determination).
Test items
Na, K, Cl, Li
Measurement cycle
Serum: 30 seconds/sample. Urine: 40seconds/sample.
4-7
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
4-8
Service Manual
XL-200
5. Pre-installation Requirements 5.1. Site Requirement The proper location is an important consideration; a poor location can lead to malfunction of the analyzer. Please follow the following environmental and electrical suggestions to ensure the accuracy and precision of the analyzer. NOTE: This will also ensure a high level of operator and technical service personal's working comfort and safety.
5.1.1. Enviormental Requirments 5.1.1.1. Proper Room Temperature Measure the room temperature at different corners of the Laboratory. The recommended temperature is 22 to 28°C with 40 to 80% humidity. NOTE: Room temperature should not be varying more than 2°C per hour.
5.1.1.2. Proper Ventilation Make sure that there is at least 0.25 meters of un-used space around the instrument on all three sides, to enable proper ventilation. Please do not put any stationery or any other item by which operating the analyzer becomes difficult. Please make sure that there is no direct air flow of air-conditioner on analyzer.
5.1.1.3. Dust Free Environment Verify and ensure a dust free environment for analyzer, this is a small but very important consideration when installing the analyzer.
5.1.2. Extrenal Interferences Heavy-duty electrical devices like Air conditioners, refrigerators, ovens, centrifuges etc. should not be operated on the same electrical lines as the Analyzer or in the close vicinity of the analyzer. The room should be free of vibrations from heavy-duty devices like Centrifuges and Compressors. The room should be free from strong magnetic fields caused by other medical equipment, like CT Scans, MRI etc. Mobile phones should not be operated close to the Analyzer.
5-1
Service Manual
XL-200
5.1.3. Verifying Proper Room Lightining There should be sufficient room lighting, the lighting should be even, and there should be no shadow areas, this problem can be eliminated by the use of multiple light source from diagonally opposite directions. This will enable efficient operator use, and will give a clear visible access to the internal components of the analyzer during operation and technical servicing.
5.2. Electrical Requirements NOTE: Failure to properly ground the XL-200 bypasses important safety features and may result in permanent damage to the analyzer that may void the warranty it is absolutely necessary to ensure proper grounding.
5.2.1. Voltage and Frequency Single-phase continuous stabilized AC 220 volts ± 10%, 50/60Hz or AC 110 volts ± 10%, 50/60Hz supply. The analyzer comes equipped with a three-pin power cord. The type of cord and plug depends on the source voltage for the system.
5.2.2. Grounding Perfect grounding must be provided at the power source with all applicable local requirements (a grounded, 3 pin power plug only should be used).
5.2.3. Plug Points Four 5Amp sockets must be available near the analyzer. (Four sockets are required, one each for the analyzer, computer, monitor and printer). It is recommended that two extra sockets be provided near the analyzer, for use by a measuring equipment or engineering tool if required while servicing (Example Oscilloscope, Soldering iron etc.). Heavy-duty electrical devices like Air conditioners, refrigerators, ovens etc. should not be operated on the same electrical lines as the analyzer. NOTE: Improper grounding to the XL-200 bypasses important safety features and may result in an electrical hazard.
5-2
Service Manual
XL-200 NOTE: The 3 pin power cord plugs shipped with the analyzer, computer, printer and monitor may not be compatible with the local electrical sockets of some countries, to have these procured from the local market prior to the installation.
5.3. Analyzer View and Dimensions 5.3.1. Front View
5-3
Service Manual
XL-200
5.3.2. Right Side View
5-4
Service Manual
XL-200
5.4. Floor Requirements
5-5
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
5-6
Service Manual
XL-200
6. Installation 6.1. Basic Operational Information Receiving Instructions The analyzer is thoroughly tested before shipment and is packed carefully to prevent damage during shipping and handling. Please follow these guidelines on receipt of the analyzer: Ensure that the arrows on the sides of the packages are pointing up. If the
arrows do not point up, make a remark about this on the invoice copy.
Visually inspect the outside of the package for rips, dents, or possible
shipping damage. Document any sign of damage on the bill of lading, regardless of how insignificant it may appear. This is to protect your interests.
Notify your service representative that the analyzer system and its
components have arrived. Wait for your local service representative to unpack the system and open the packages.
Follow the unpacking and storage instructions provided on the outside of
the package. Special requirements such as refrigeration are clearly marked on the outside of the cartons and will be included in the unpacking instructions and pack inserts.
Warranty Information All analyzers are warranted against defective materials or workmanship for a period of one year commencing from the date of the shipment of the analyzer. This warranty does not cover any defect, malfunction, or damage due to: Accident, neglect or willful mistreatment of the product. Failure to operate service or maintain the product in accordance with the
applicable Operator Manual and Service Manual.
Use of reagents or chemicals of corrosive nature, though the unit is an open
system allowing the use of any commercial reagents from any manufacturer that are meant for such an automated clinical chemistry analyzer.
6-1
Service Manual
XL-200
6.2. Unpacking the Analyzer Caution: Unpack the analyzer carefully; otherwise you may damage the accurately adjusted optical and electronic assemblies. The analyzer is packed carefully to prevent any shipping damage. Upon arrival, inspect the packing according to the list and notify the carrier of any apparent damage. Follow the steps to install the analyzer: 1. Remove the front panel of the wooden box by loosening the bolts. The front panel on the wooden box is marked. 2. Remove the top and side panels of the wooden box as a whole section by loosening the bolts from the back panel side. 3. Remove the four “Z” brackets, which are holding the analyzer on the pallet. Caution: The “Z” bracket and the footrest may support the entire weight of the instrument. Cautiously open the bolts of the “Z” bracket to prevent any personal injury. 4. Lift the analyzer from the pallet & place at installation space. (Refer section 5.4 Floor Requirements). 5. Gently slide the Probe upwards, making sure you do not damage the probe, once you have reached the top most position, rotate it and position it over the trough. 6. Gently slide the Stirrer arm upwards, making sure you do not damage the paddles, once you have reached the top most position, rotate it and position it over the trough. Remove the protective material. 7. Gently slide the CRU arm upwards to the top most position, making sure you do not damage the probes, and remove the protective material and clean debris. 8. Remove the buffers that are present in the RGT & ASP areas, as well around the CRU Stirrer and Probe.
6-2
Service Manual
XL-200
Caution: The instrument is shipped, mounted on "Z" brackets; the "Z" bracket and the four legs may support the entire weight of the instrument. Open the bolts of the "Z" bracket to prevent any personal injury. It is important to have leveling done of the place where analyzer is going to be installed before placing the analyzer.
6.3. Inspection and Accessories Checklist The analyzer is fully inspected before leaving the factory and carefully packed to withstand shocks in transit. On receiving the analyzer, check the package externally; make sure that there is no external visible damage to the shipping container. If there is damage please make a note of it, if possible photograph it and inform the designated service personnel. Verify with the invoice, if all the boxes have arrived. NOTE: The accessories supplied with the analyzer are subject to change without prior notice. The shipment generally contains the following packages: 1. Analyzer wooden box. 2. Accessories Cardboard box. (mounted on pallet) 3. Other accessories boxes (optional) could include. a. Printer
6-3
Service Manual
XL-200
b. Computer etc. SR.NO.
ITEM CODE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
---
Operator Manual
1 No.
2
---
Software CD
1 No.
3*
105412
20 liter Can Assy for D I Water assy.
1 No.
4*
105419
20 liter Can Assy for Waste assy.
1 No.
5*
105365
10 liter Can Assy for Bio-hazardous Waste assy.
1 No.
6*
105415
10 liter Can Assy for cleaning solution assy.
1 No.
7
105403
Reagent Tray Assy.
1 No.
8*
104764
Reagent Tray Cover Assy.
1 No.
9*
104664
Standard Sample Tray (1-30) Assy.
1 No.
10
107051
RGT Bottle Locating Plate – XL200
1 No.
Tool-kit—Containing 11
101494
Plastic Tool Box
1 No.
12
101688
Screw Driver (imp) +Ve No.-1-CR-V –carbon tip
1 No.
13
101687
Screw Driver (imp) +Ve No.-2-CR-V –carbon tip
1 No.
14
101689
Screw Driver (-) NO.3
1 No.
15
101675
Nut Driver (M3) 5.5mm
1 No.
16
101676
Nut Driver (M4)7mm
1 No.
17
101495
Box Spanner 10 / 11
1 No.
18
101692
ALLEN DRIVER (M3) 2.5 MM T TYPE-9" LONG
1 No.
19
101693
ALLEN DRIVER (M4) 3.0 MM T TYPE-9" LONG
1 No.
20
101694
ALLEN DRIVER (M5) 4.0 MM T TYPE-9" LONG
1 No.
21
111604
HEX BALL ALLEN KEY SET CONSISTING OF 1.5mm, 2mm, 2.5mm, 3 mm, 4mm, 5mm, 6mm ALLEN KEYS WITH PLASTIC HOLDER & BLISTER PACKING
1 Set.
22
101514
Nose plier
1 No.
23
101515
Flat Spanner 10 / 11
1 No.
24
101524
Flat Spanner 14 / 15
1NO.
25
100323
Forcep – 6 inches
1 No.
26
100295
Trimmer (3x75).
1 No.
27
101516
Bunch spanner set (1 to 8 no.)
1 No.
28
101678
6” Adjustable Spanner
1 No.
29
100294
Tube cutter
1 No.
30
100679
Calibration Plate
1 No.
31
201209
GAUGE FOR PROBE CALIBRATION
1 No.
32
100263
CUVETTE (4C:0609)
3 Nos.
Shipper Box Containing 33
101421
CABLE ASSEMBLY OF USB JUMPER USBC-AM-BM-BB-S-2/USB2.0 AM/BM-1.8M 33-2 x 0160-101
1 No.
34
100344
TYPE G PLUG -
1 No.
6-4
Service Manual
XL-200
35
105067
Sample tube with bar code labels.
10 Nos.
36
100634
Test Tube Adapter for molded sample holding plate
30 Nos.
37
108159
Assy. of waste Can tube & can cap
1 No.
38
108162
Assy of Bio-hazard Can tube & can cap
1 No.
39
108160
Assy. of D.I. Water Can tube & can cap
1 No.
40
108161
Assy of Cleaning solution can tube & can cap
1 No.
41
106653
LEVEL SENSOR ASSY FOR 20LTR DI WATER CAN
1 No.
42
106654
LEVEL SENSOR ASSY FOR 10LTR CLEANING SOLN CAN
1 No.
43
106655
LEVEL SENSOR ASSY FOR 10LTR BIOHAZARDOUS CAN
1 No.
44
106656
LEVEL SENSOR ASSY FOR 20LTR WASTE CAN
1 No.
45
182581
REAGENT BOTTLE (20 ml) WITH CAP
25 No.
46
182584
REAGENT BOTTLE (50 ml) WITH CAP
25 No.
47
---
Reagent Bottles (20 ml.) With Caps and Bar code labels
2 Nos.
48
---
Reagent Bottles (50 ml.) With Caps and Bar code labels
2 Nos.
49
100592
5 ml. Reagent bottle Adapter (new)
50 Nos.
50
109880
Outer Holder for 5ml Reagent Adaptor
5 Nos.
51
100660
PVC Support For 20ml Reagent Bottle
25 Nos.
52
100536
Rubber Cup For Sample Tray
10 Nos.
53
105140
Screw Cap For Philips Head CSK Screw
11 Nos.
54
110318
CABLE TIE SIZE 2.5 MM X 100 MM KP138
25 Nos.
55
180510
SUPPORT FOR CRICK
10 Nos.
56
102932
Sample Cups (Pack of 150 nos.)
2 Packs.
57
109522
Kit for syringe bubble removal
1 No.
58
106848
GASKET SILICON FOR WATER FILTER DIA-35
2 Nos.
P. M. Kit (new) II ---
1 No
59
102851
Cuvette Drier
2 Nos.
60
105474
Laundry Aspiration tubing set (2 probe construction )
2 Set
61
105475
Laundry Dispensing tubing set (2 probe construction)
1 Set
62
182220
Photometer Lamp Assembly
4 Nos.
63
104604
Set of Fuses FOR XL-200 / RES-920
1 Set
64
107613
10 micron filter (125mm length)
4 Nos.
65
107580
BD SPINAL NEEDLE (25 GA 3.5IN,0.50x90mm, item 405257)
1 No.
66
101677
Probe Cleaner
1 No.
67
109712
Washer For CRU Knob
1 No.
Accessories for ISE Unit 68
200004
Reference Electrode For ISE
1 No.
69
200001
Na Electrode For ISE
1 No.
70
200002
K Electrode For ISE
1 No.
71
200003
Cl Electrode For ISE
1 No.
6-5
Service Manual
XL-200
72
100346
SPACER ELECTRODE - REF 5206
1 No.
73
105542
Cleaning Solution
1 No.
74
100315
Reagent Pack
1 No.
75
--
Reagent pack location pad
1 No.
Optional Items 76
---
Computer with mains cord
1 No.
77
---
Keyboard
1 No.
78
---
Mouse Sr no
1 No.
79
---
Flat screen monitor with cord Sr No
1 No.
80
181219
Printer with cord & cable
1 No.
81
---
Instructions for assembling computer trolley
1 No.
82
111169
Computer Trolley
1 No.
Miscellaneous 83
---
FQC Report
1 No.
84
---
Unit Installation Instruction Sheet
1 No.
85
---
Hydraulic diagram sheet
1 No.
86
102683
ERBA XL WASH Kit
1 No.
* - Optional (As per the customer’s requirement)
6.4. Installing the Components of the Analyzer Warning: To avoid a shock hazard, ground the Analyzer, Computer, Printer and Monitor using a 3 pin grounded electric outlet. Do not use an adapter, as it could cause a loose contact and improper grounding. NOTE: Confirm that all cuvettes have been fitted properly into their respective slots on the reaction tray and none of them are jutting out.
NOTE: When removing or placing the cuvettes into their slots make sure that you grip them by their sides and top end, never let the fingers or any sharp. Objects come in contact with the optical area.
6.4.1. Installing the Sample Tray and the Reagent Tray 1. Unpack the Sample tray from the accessories box and hold the sample tray with your right hand 2. Gently place the sample tray into the Sample tray container, make sure that the index pin on the Sample Transport, slides into the index hole provided on the sample tray.
6-6
Service Manual
XL-200
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
3. Unpack the Reagent tray from the accessories box. Hold the Reagent tray with your right hand. Gently place the Reagent tray into the reagent tray well.
Step 1
Step 2 4. Make sure that the index pin on the Reagent transport slides into the index hole provided on the Reagent tray.
6-7
Service Manual
XL-200
6.4.2. Installing DI Water, Cleaning, Bio-hazardous and Waste Cans 1. Unpack the Float Sensors for the 4 Cans and place them on one side. 2. From the accessory box remove the 20 liters DI Water Can, 20 liters Waste Can, 10 liters Bio-hazardous Waste Can and the 10 liters Cleaning solution Can, and put them on the floor. 3. Unpack Float Sensors cables and connect one end to respective connector (located on the right panel of the analyzer) and connect other end to the respective Cans (Longer float sensors with blue sleeves for DI Water, green sleeves for Cleaning solution, red sleeves for Bio-hazardous Waste, and yellow sleeves for Waste). 4. Fill the DI Water Can with 20 liters of fresh DI water and unpack the tubing’s from the accessory box. Install filter in DI water Can. 5. Take two separate tubes and connect one end to the Blue ringed outlet marked DI-WATER and White ringed outlet marked DI-WATER LAMP provided on the analyzer. Connect other ends to the SS (stainless steel) nozzle and White ringed nozzle on 20 liter DI Water Can. NOTE: Make sure that the tube connected to Blue ring on the analyzer should be connected to SS nozzle on the DI water Can and the tube connected to White ring should be connected to White ringed nozzle (for lamp cooling). 6. Now, fill 5 liters of DI water into the cleaning solution to prepare working cleaning solution: Add 50 ml of neutral cleaning solution to 5 liter of DI water to prepare a 2% solution. 7. Now take another tube and connect one end to the Green ringed outlet marked CLEANING and other end to green ringed nozzle on 10 liter Cleaning solution Can. 8. Take two separate tubes and connect one end to the Red ringed outlet marked WASTE-3 and BIO-HZ. Connect other ends to the red ringed nozzle on 10 liter Bio-hazardous Can. 9. Take one more tube and connect one end to the Yellow ringed outlet marked WASTE-2 and connect its other end to the yellow ringed nozzle on 20 liter Waste Can. 10. Now connect the large diameter silicon tube to the analyzer outlet marked TROUGH WASTE and connect the other end of the tubing into the 20 liter Waste Can.
6-8
Service Manual
XL-200 NOTE: Take care that all the above-mentioned tubes reach their respective containers without any sharp bends or obstructions.
NOTE: The waste consists of a natural drain. Make sure that the large silicon waste tube from the analyzer to the Waste can is slant and in downwards direction without any bends. Failing to take the above precaution may cause a back flow of waste solution, out of the manifold air release tube on waste manifold. Or could result in noisy operation, big gargling sounds being created by the waste lines.
To DI water Can on SS nozzle
Blue float sensor cable for DI Water Can
To Cleaning Solution Can
Green float sensor cable for Cleaning Solution Can
To Biohazardous Can
Red float sensor cable for Biohazardous Can
To Waste Can Yellow float sensor cable for Waste Can
To DI Water Can for lamp cooling
6-9
Service Manual
XL-200
Stainless steel (SS) nozzle on DI water Can
Stainless steel nozzle on Waste Can
White ringed nozzle
Yellow ringed nozzle
Red ringed nozzle
Green ringed nozzle
6-10
Service Manual
XL-200
6.4.3. Connecting communication cable between Computer and Analyzer Follow these instruction to connect the analyzer from the computer: 1. Unpack the USB cable from the accessories box, and connect its one end to the appropriate serial port of the computer and other end to the connector located on the left side of the instrument, as shown in figure below.
Analyzer
On/Off Power button
Power Outlet
USB Connector
2. Connect the one end of the power cord to the analyzer’s power outlet at the other end to the main power supply as shown in figure above. NOTE: Make sure that the On/Off power button should be in OFF condition before turning on the main power supply. 3. The instrument is connected with the computer and ready to power on.
6.4.4. Connecting Computer Peripheral Devices Place the computer, keyboard, mouse and monitor on a trolley / table (optional). Connect the mouse, keyboard and monitor to the computer as mentioned in the Computer manual, which is enclosed within the computer box.
6-11
Service Manual
XL-200
For further assistance on installing the computer system you could contact your local Computer distributor, the list of Distributors / Service centers, worldwide is mentioned in the computer manual.
6.5. Equipment Startup Procedure Perform the following verification before starting the equipment: Make sure that tube connections with Bio-hazardous waste Can, Cleaning
Can, DI Water Can and Waste Can are properly done.
Make sure that tray lids are properly placed on Sample Tray, RCT and
Reagent Tray.
Once the verification is done, the instrument can be connected to power supply. After performing the above checks, follow the procedure for starting the equipment: NOTE: Before starting the main supply, make sure that the ON/OFF switches located on the left and right side of the instrument should be in OFF condition. 1. Plug in the one end of the power cord to the main supply. 2. Turn on the main power switch. NOTE: The 3 pin power cord plugs shipped with the analyzer, computer, printer and monitor may not be compatible with the local electrical sockets of some countries, need is to have these procured from the local market prior to the installation. 3. Turn on the switch that is provided on the left side of the instrument. NOTE: When this button is pressed, the ISE unit will be started, if installed on the instrument. Verify and confirm that all ISE electrodes have been properly installed; their walls are flush against each other with the rubber “O” rings in place if analyzer is equipped with ISE. Verify and confirm that the reagent cooling fan has started rotating, also touch and physically verify the cooling of the reagent tray, also verify from the sound, that the ISE pumps have started priming. 4. Turn on the instrument switch provided on the right side. This initializes the system, and all assemblies will come to home position. 5. Now the instrument is powered-ON, and ready. 6. Install MultiXL software if not already installed. Refer section 6.6 Software Installation Procedure for more details.
6-12
Service Manual
XL-200 NOTE: The main power switch should be on at all times except in an emergency. The main power supplies electricity to ISE unit for automatic priming of ISE and Reagent cooling unit.
6.6. Software Installation Procedure This section guides you through the installation and up-gradation procedure of MultiXL software. You must read the installation instructions carefully before installing the software.
6.6.1. Overview The MultiXL software is the application software for the automated clinical chemistry analyzer. This software is multilingual and supports even Asian languages like Chinese, Japanese, and Thai etc.
6.6.2. Pre-requisite 6.6.2.1. System Configuration Pentium IV, 2.8Ghz or above Processor Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service pack 2 or 3 or Windows 7 Professional English Edition (32-bit) Hard disk 80 GB or above Minimum 1 GB RAM for Windows XP Service pack 2/3 RAM or Minimum 2 GB RAM for Windows 7 17 inch / 19 inch color monitor with 1024 * 768 Monitor resolution Laser/ Desk Jet Printer
6.6.2.2. PC Settings Required for Windows XP NOTE: PC Settings will be applied automatically while installing the customized image of Windows 7 Embedded as Operating System. * A customized image of Windows 7 Embedded is provided by the analyzer manufacturer, as Operating System for Analyzer PC. Remove all memory resident software including anti-virus software from the
Analyzer PC.
Remove firewall, automatic update, other security software and / or settings
from the Analyzer PC.
6-13
Service Manual
XL-200
Do not run any other application on the Analyzer PC during batch run on
Analyzer.
Disable Screen-savers and Power Management on Analyzer PC before
starting the Application Software.
Ensure that a default printer (Laser Jet / Desk Jet) is configured and
connected to Analyzer PC. Set appropriate printer should be set as default printer.
Delete the “Microsoft Office Document Image Writer” and “Microsoft
XPS Document Writer” from the system. Following is the procedure.
Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes. Select the “Microsoft Office Document Image Writer” and delete. Similarly, delete “Microsoft XPS Document Writer”. Windows Login User requires Administrative privileges to Install and Run
the Application.
6.6.2.3. Regional and Language Settings for Windows XP Ensure that the following regional and language settings are appropriate. Note that these are critical settings for the communication with the Analyzer. Go to Settings > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options. Use the following steps for setting the regional and language options: 1. Select Regional Options tab, and define the following settings. See figure below:
6-14
Service Manual
XL-200
2. Select Languages tab, and define the following settings. See figure below:
3. Select the Advanced tab, and define the following settings.
6-15
Service Manual
XL-200
6.6.2.4. PC Settings Required for Windows 7 NOTE: In case, *customized image of Windows 7 Embedded is installed as Operating System, required PC Settings will be applied automatically. * A customized image of Windows 7 Embedded is provided by the analyzer manufacturer, as Operating System for Analyzer PC. Remove all memory resident software including anti-virus software from the
Analyzer PC if installed. Use the following procedure:
Click Start button, and click Control Panel. Now, under the Category view, go to Programs > Programs and Features. Select the desired anti-virus software from the list, and click Uninstall. Remove firewall, automatic update, other security software and from the
Analyzer PC.
Click Start button, and click Control Panel. Now, under the Category view, go to System and Security > Windows Firewall, and click on the link Turn off Windows Firewall on or off. Now select the option Turn off Windows Firewall (not recommended), and then click OK button. To turn off automatic updates, under Control Panel, go to System and Security > Windows Update, click on the link Change settings, and select the Never check for updates (not recommended) from the drop down list, and click OK.
6-16
Service Manual
XL-200
Do not run any other application on the Analyzer PC during batch run on
Analyzer.
Ensure that a default printer (Laser Jet / Desk Jet) is configured and
connected to Analyzer PC. Set appropriate printer as default printer.
Delete the “Microsoft Office Document Image Writer” and “Microsoft
XPS Document Writer” from the system.
Click Start button, and click Control Panel. Now, under the Category view, go to Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. Right click on the Microsoft Office Document Image Writer, and choose Remove Device to delete. Similarly, delete “Microsoft XPS Document Writer”. Windows Login User requires Administrative privileges to Install and Run
the Application.
Disable Screen-savers and Power Management on Analyzer PC before
starting the Application Software.
Use the following procedure for disabling the screen saver and power management: a. Open Screen Saver Settings by clicking the Start button, clicking Control Panel, clicking Appearance and Personalization under Category view, clicking Personalization, and then clicking Screen Saver.
b. To turn off all screen savers, under Screen Saver, select (None) from the drop p-down list, and then click OK.
6-17
Service Manual
XL-200
c. Now click on the link Change power settings. The following screen will be displayed.
d. Click on Balanced Change plan settings.
Set Turn off the display to Never
Set Put the computer to sleep to Never
6-18
Service Manual
XL-200
e. Click on Change advanced power settings. Set Turn off hard disk after to Never
6-19
Service Manual
XL-200
Similarly apply same settings to power saver option. Repeat the step c to e. User Account Control Settings
a. Open User Account Control Settings by clicking the Start button, and then clicking Control Panel. Under Small or Large icons view, click on User Accounts and then click Change User Account Control settings.
6-20
Service Manual
XL-200
The following screen will be displayed:
b. Move Pointer to Never Notify and click OK. You must re-start the analyzer PC to turn on the User Account Control.
6.6.2.5. Regional and Language Settings for Windows 7 Use the following procedure for setting the regional and language options:
6-21
Service Manual
XL-200
Ensure that the following regional and language settings are appropriate. Note that these are critical settings for the communication with the analyzer. Go to Settings > Control Panel > Clock, Regional and Language Options > Change the date, time and number format.
a. Following should be the settings for Formats tab:
6-22
Service Manual
XL-200
b. To set Number and Currency Click on Additional settings
6-23
Service Manual
XL-200
c. Following should be the Location tab:
d. Following should be the Language tab.
e. Click on Change Keyboards following screen will display:
6-24
Service Manual
XL-200
f. Following should be the settings for Administrative tab:
6-25
Service Manual
XL-200
6.6.3. Installing MultiXL Software Follow the instructions in this section in case you are installing the application software for the first time on the computer i.e. there is no previous installation of the software on that computer. Refer to section 6.6.4 Upgrading MultiXL Software, to upgrade software from existing version to the new higher version.
6.6.3.1. Installing MultiXL Follow these instruction for installing the application: 1. Insert the Software Installation CD into the CD drive of the analyzer PC. On inserting the CD, the MultiXL Installation screen will be displayed. Or Go to Windows Explorer. Right-click on CD/DVD ROM-Drive. Click on AutoPlay option.
Or Go to Windows Explorer. Right-click on CD/DVD ROM-Drive. Click on Explore and double-click on Launcher.bat. The following screen will be displayed.
6-26
Service Manual
XL-200
2. Click on Install MultiXL Application & Database link and follow the onscreen instructions. Or Click on the Browse this CD link. The software installation CD contains the folders and files as shown in the figure below:
3. Open Setup folder, and double-click on the setup.exe. On clicking, the following screen will be displayed.
6-27
Service Manual
XL-200
NOTE: This screen will not be displayed if .NET framework 2 is already installed on your computer.
6-28
Service Manual
XL-200
4. Click Accept to continue. On clicking, the following screen will be displayed.
NOTE: This screen will not be displayed if Crystal Reports for .NET framework 2.0 is already installed on your computer. 5. Click Accept to continue. On clicking, the following screen will be displayed.
6-29
Service Manual
XL-200
NOTE: This screen will not be displayed if SQL Server 2005 Express Edition is already installed on the analyzer computer. In case, Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine (MSDE) is already installed then the following screen will be displayed in Windows XP. The installer will not proceed with the MultiXL installation.
Click on Close and uninstall the Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine from Control Panel > Add / Remove Program. Then start the MultiXL installation again. Please refer to Migration Guide for Database Engine, MSDE to SQL Server Express 2005 from the Installation CD, namely “Migration Steps from MSDE to SQL Express.chm”.
6-30
Service Manual
XL-200
In case of Windows 7 operating system, following screen may appear while installing MultiXL Application. Please click on Run Program button to continue with MultiXL Installation.
NOTE: It is not necessary to apply SQL Server 2005 Service Pack 3 (SP3) or later Service Pack as shown in the above screenshot. On clicking, the following screens will be displayed in a sequence.
6-31
Service Manual
XL-200
Wait until the setup wizard is visible on the screen as shown below.
6. Click Next. On clicking, the following window will be displayed.
6-32
Service Manual
XL-200
On keeping Configure Database checkbox checked (ticked), the installer will create or upgrade the database along with the installation of MultiXL. (In case, the Database is found present then the existing database will be upgraded to the latest version. When the Database is not found then the installer will create a blank Database). In case, Configure Database option is unchecked; the installer will not create/upgrade the database and you have to install it manually. Refer section 6.6.3.2.1 Installing Blank Database for more details. 7. Click Next. The following screen will be displayed.
6-33
Service Manual
XL-200
The installer will install the software in the default location C:\Program Files\MultiXL\. NOTE: The installation in a location, different from the default one, is not recommendable. 8. Ensure that “Everyone” is selected, and click Next. On clicking, the following window will be displayed. Click Next to confirm the installation.
6-34
Service Manual
XL-200
9. On clicking Next, the installation is started and the status will be displayed, as shown below.
6-35
Service Manual
XL-200
The following screen will be displayed if the Configure Database option is selected.
Once the above operation is completed, the software icon will be created on the desktop and the Installation Complete screen will be displayed
6-36
Service Manual
XL-200
10. Click on Close to close the screen and restart the computer. 11. Now double click on MultiXL icon [ ] from the desktop or choose Start > All Programs > MultiXL to start the application. NOTE: The Detect Regional Settings screen will be displayed and the application halts in case, if the language setting is other than English (United States).
See section 6.6.2.3 Regional and Language Settings for Windows XP in more details. For Windows 7 operating system, refer section Regional and Language Settings for Windows 7. The following observations are noted after installing MultiXL on Windows 7 Embedded operating system: MultiXL Shutdown
On clicking Shutdown button in MultiXL, Analyzer PC will shut down automatically, after completing auto-maintenance activities on analyzer. The windows key
(left and right) will be disabled from the keyboard. Logging of MultiXL start and shutdown events (for internal use).
MultiXL screen will cover the desktop in its maximized state. USB mass storage devices will be disabled.
NOTE: USB drive can be accessible through Administrator login only. To copy software data to USB drive, use Utility > Backup screen. Restricted user account for MultiXL.
6-37
Service Manual
XL-200
To install and uninstall any application from the PC, you must be logged on as (windows) user “Administrator”. To log in to the administrative account, go to Start > Shutdown > Logoff and then click the Administrator icon and provide the administrator password. The default administrator password is tbm1234@.
6.6.3.2. Installing Database Warning: The installation and restoring database should be performed by the trained person only. Database installation is required only if the Configure Database option was deselected (unchecked) during installation (Refer step 6 of section Installing MultiXL). In case, Configure Database option is selected (ticked by default) during Software Installation then the Database will be created / upgraded automatically as part of installation. (Database, when already exists, will be upgraded to the latest version. When database is not found on PC, then the installer will create a blank database). In case, the Configure Database option is not selected, then the database should be installed manually, as follows. NOTE: Always use Database Utility folder from the software CD, which consists of files required to install or upgrade the database. See section 6.6.3.2.1 Installing Blank Database for more details. NOTE: If you are getting “Operating System error 5 (Access denied)” while performing the above mention steps then refer section 20.2.1 SQL Server 2005 Configuration for SQL Server 2005 Settings. 6.6.3.2.1. Installing Blank Database For installing the Blank Database from Software CD, use the following instructions: 1. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL installation screen as shown below.
6-38
Service Manual
XL-200
Or Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and double-click DatabaseUtility.exe. Default Database folder is the one from where the DatabaseUtility.exe is running. Database folder refers to the Database, required for performing various operations and storing the result data. 2. Click on CHECK DATABASE. This command will check for the existing database on your computer. If no database is available, a message is displayed on the following screen.
3. Click on CREATE DATABASE. This will create the database from the location specified on the screen. This is the default location where the blank database is stored in software installation CD.
6-39
Service Manual
XL-200
(To restore the backup of new database, you need to change the location using BROWSE FILE button. Refer section 6.6.5.2.2 Restoring Backup of New Database in more details). For example, in the above screen, the database location is E:\Database Utility\MultiXL BKP.
If Archive is not available then utility will ask for Blank Database location and the following window will be displayed.
4. Now click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the software CD, and then click Open.
6-40
Service Manual
XL-200
After some time, the database will be created successfully and the following screen will be displayed.
5. Once the database is created, click CHECK DATABASE to ensure the proper creation of the database. The following screen will be displayed.
6-41
Service Manual
XL-200
6. The above screen indicates that the database is installed successfully. Click Close to exit from the utility screen. 7. Now you can access the MultiXL application. Refer section 6.6.6 Accessing MultiXL Software for more details. NOTE: 1. Make sure that all software versions are installed correctly. 2. To check the installed software versions, go to Service Check screen, right click on the Misc Commands button, and choose Software Version option.
6.6.4. Upgrading MultiXL Software If the MultiXL software is already installed on the analyzer computer and you receive a newer version of software, then the following steps should be performed: Upgrade MultiXL Software Upgrade MultiXL Database
Caution: Take a database backup, before proceeding with software upgrade.
6.6.4.1. Upgrade Software You can upgrade the software version by un-installing the existing software version from the PC and installing the newer version from the CD as follows. 6.6.4.1.1. Un-installing Software To un-install the software, do one of the following: 1. Click on the Uninstall MultiXL Application from the MultiXL Installation screen as shown below.
6-42
Service Manual
XL-200
Or Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel. In the Control Panel, double click on Add or Remove Programs. This method is used only, if you are using Windows XP operating system. For Windows 7 operating systems, click Start button on the desktop, under Category view, go to Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features. 2. Select the MultiXL software, and then click Remove. On clicking, the software will be removed from the computer. NOTE: To uninstall the MultiXL software you must be logged on as user “Administrator”. 6.6.4.1.2. Installing Software - New Version Refer section 6.6.3.1 Installing MultiXL for more details.
6.6.4.2. Upgrade Database Upgrade the database using the software CD of the newer version whenever you install the new software version. Database can be upgraded to match the newer software version without deleting the database of the existing version. NOTE: Ensure to take Database backup before upgrading the Database.
6-43
Service Manual
XL-200
6.6.4.2.1. Upgrading Database Follow these instructions for upgrading the database: 1. Click on the Run Database Utility link from MultiXL Installation screen as shown below.
Or Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Doubleclick on DatabaseUtility.exe. 2. Click UPGRADE DB.
On clicking, the system prompt to select the upgrade script file, as shown in the following screen Select the upgrade script file from the software CD, and then click Open.
6-44
Service Manual
XL-200 NOTE: The upgrade script file is provided in the application software CD in the Database Utility folder.
On clicking, the upgrade process starts. If archive Database is not available then the utility will prompt to select the path for Blank Database and the following screen will be displayed.
3. Click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the software CD, and then click Open.
6-45
Service Manual
XL-200
After some time, the database will be upgraded successfully and the following screen will be displayed.
4. Click
to close the database utility screen.
5. Now you can access the MultiXL application. Refer section 6.6.6 Accessing MultiXL software for more details.
6-46
Service Manual
XL-200 NOTE: After installing the new software version, if the database is not upgraded using the upgrade script file provided in the Software CD then the following screen will be displayed on starting the application software. This screen indicates the software and database version mismatch.
In case, the software and database version mismatch screen is displayed; upgrade the database using the script file, provided in the software CD. Refer section software CD. Refer section 6.6.4.2.1 Upgrading Database for more details.
6.6.5. Database Utility Options The Database Utility can be used to take the Database Backup or change the Database.
6.6.5.1. Database Backup Follow these instructions for taking the backup of database: 1. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen. Or Open Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and doubleclick DatabaseUtility.exe. 2. Click on CHECK DATABASE. The following screen will be displayed.
6-47
Service Manual
XL-200
3. Click on BACKUP DATABASE. The following screen will be displayed.
4. Choose the path to store the backup, and then click Save. On clicking, the following screen will be displayed to confirm the successful completion of backup database.
6-48
Service Manual
XL-200
If archive database is present then backup will be stored with “ARH” extension with the same default file name. For example: In this case archive backup will be stored on the same path with file name “MultiXL1812013.ARH”. The default file name contains “MultiXL” (the application name), followed by date, month and year.
6.6.5.2. Change Database In case, if you wish to change the database, you must delete the existing database and then restore the backup of another database using database utility, NOTE: It is recommended to change the database with proper guidance of expert service engineer. Improper installation may impact the calibration of the analyzer, in addition to loss of data such as QC data and chemistry calibration.
NOTE: Before installation, you should take the backup of the database before deleting or changing the database. Database can be changed in two parts: 1. Delete (existing) Database. 2. Restore Backup of another Database. 6.6.5.2.1. Deleting existing database Follow these instructions for deleting the database: 1. Click on the Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen. Or Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD, and double-click DatabaseUtility.exe.
6-49
Service Manual
XL-200
2. Click on CHECK DATABASE to check whether the database is present.
3. Click on DELETE DATABASE to delete the existing database. The following screen will be displayed.
4. Click on Yes to continue with database deletion. On clicking, the warning message will be displayed to re-confirm the deletion.
5. Click Yes to continue. On clicking, a message will be displayed to take the database backup before deletion.
6-50
Service Manual
XL-200
6. Click Yes to take the backup. The following window will be displayed to select desired Backup location. Select the appropriate location for saving the backup database.
NOTE: On clicking No, Production (Live) & Archive database will be deleted without taking the database backup. Best Practice: Backup database before deleting the same. 7. Click Save to save the database. The following screen will be displayed after successful deletion of the database.
6-51
Service Manual
XL-200
6.6.5.2.2. Restoring backup of new database 8. Click on Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen. Or Open Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Doubleclick DatabaseUtility.exe. 9. Click on CHECK DATABASE. 10. Now, click on the BROWSE FILE. Select the location where the backup database file is saved.
6-52
Service Manual
XL-200
11. Select the database file and then click Open. The following screen will be displayed.
12. Click on CREATE DATABASE. On clicking, the database will be created and the following screen would be displayed. NOTE: If the Archive is not available then utility will ask for blank database location. Select blank database file (MultiXL.BKP) from the latest software CD.
13. Click OK and select the blank database file MultiXL.BKP from the application CD.
6-53
Service Manual
XL-200
14. Click Open. The following screen will be displayed after successful creation of database.
15. Click on CHECK DATABASE to ensure proper creation of the database.
6-54
Service Manual
16. Click
XL-200
to close the database utility screen.
17. Now you can access the MultiXL application. Refer section 6.6.6 Accessing MultiXL Software for more details. 6.6.5.2.3. Restoring Archive Database Follow these instructions to restore the archived database: 1. Click on the Run Database Utility from the MultiXL Installation screen. Or Open the Database Utility folder from the software installation CD. Doubleclick DatabaseUtility.exe. 2. Click on RESTORE ARCHIVE. The following window will be displayed. Select the appropriate location where the archive database is saved and then click Open.
6-55
Service Manual
XL-200
3. After restoring the archive database successfully, the following screen will be displayed.
6.6.5.3. Taking Diagnosis Backup This button is used to take the database backup for diagnosis which will be without patient demographics to support patient privacy policy. Diagnosis backup can be used by support team only for troubleshooting purpose. Following are the list of demographics that are excluded from the diagnosis database: Patient Name, Patient ID, Patient Address (line 1, 2 and 3), Patient Tel. No. Patient Remarks, Area i.e. Location of the Sample Collection, Reference Doctor Analyst. To take the backup of the data base, use the following steps:
6-56
Service Manual
XL-200
1. Run Database Utility. 2. Click on DIAGNOSIS BACKUP. On clicking, the diagnosis backup database will be created with a file name and saved in the location C:\MultiXLLog folder. See figure below.
For example, diagnosis backup created on 30 Sept 2013 at 11:30:45 am will have file name “MultiXL_20130930113045.DIAG”. 3. After the completion of backup, user should copy the file name and send to support team for diagnosis.
6.6.6. Accessing MultiXL Software NOTE: MultiXL screens are best viewed with 1024 * 768 resolution. On starting MultiXL, the monitor resolution, if different, will change automatically to 1024*768 pixels. On closing MultiXL, the resolution will be restored to the previous. Once MultiXL software is installed successfully; next time on PC startup, MultiXL software will be launched automatically. To access the software do one of the following: Turn on the analyzer PC. MultiXL application will start automatically OR Double click on the MultiXL icon created on your desktop OR Go to Start > Programs > MultiXL.
When starting MultiXL first time, the product login screen as shown below will be displayed.
6-57
Service Manual
XL-200
The product login password and Location is written on the software CD. NOTE: Product Login is critical (one-time) stage. Software is configured suitably based on the inputs in this screen. Please contact Service Engineer, in case Product Login details are not available on Software CD. Enter the appropriate details in the PRODUCT LOGIN and PASSWORD, select appropriate LOCATION, and then click OK. On clicking OK, the User login screen as shown below will be displayed.
NOTE: This screen will be displayed every time, on starting MultiXL. Enter the following details, and then click OK. You may use this Login details for the first time and create the other login IDs with appropriate user access rights. See section User Rights in Operator Manual for more details. Login ID
: Guest or guest.
Password
: Guest (Case – sensitive)
The main screen will be opened.
6-58
Service Manual
XL-200
6.6.7. Password Recovery Procedure This section describes the procedure to recover the password for the user login Guest, in case you lose or forget the password. However, the password for other user logins can be reset by the administrator for their login from the Settings > User Rights screen. See section User Rights in Operator Manual for more details. Follow this procedure for recovering login password for Guest: 1. In the login screen, enter Guest in the Login ID textbox and click on the link “Click Here” as shown in figure below.
6-59
Service Manual
XL-200
2. On clicking the link, a text file with the password details is created at the location C:\MultiXLLOG. The file name and the path will be displayed as follows.
3. Go to folder C:\MultiXLLOG, and send the generated text file, for example ‘ForgotPWD20110420.Txt’ to the service engineer. See figure as shown below.
4. Click OK to close.
6.6.8. Steps Performed by the Service Engineer The following steps will be performed by the service engineer: 1. Open Password Recovery Utility software from the CD. 2. Click Browse, and select the appropriate text file that is received by the operator. 3. Click Ok.
6-60
Service Manual
XL-200
The password details will be displayed on the screen.
6.7. Main Menu Software Layout
The Main Menu consists of following screens: Patient Entry – This option is used to define patient demographics and schedule tests, Calculation items, and Test profiles. Test Parameters – This option is used to define Test details, set Auto-rerun for a single or multiple test, set Online Calibration to trace reagent bottle change, Cuvette Wash, Download & Upload test, and initialize test. Profiles/Calc – This screen is used for defining new Profiles or Calculation Items
6-61
Service Manual
XL-200
QC/Calibrations – This option is used to schedule calibration (Blanks, Standards, and Calibrators) and Controls. This option is also used to view the calibration curves for a particular test, the QC Data and Twin Plot graph. Consumables – This option is used to define consumables such as Blanks, Reagents, Standards, Calibrators, Controls, Diluents/Serum diluents, Wash Solution, SI reagent, and Urine ISE diluents. Status Monitor – This option is used to perform calibration/patient batch run, view liquid level of reagents for different Tests and perform Sample & Reagent Barcode scans. It is also used to view online reaction curve and the progress of the batch run. Search – This screen is used for searching Patient Results, Calibration / Control Results, Patients, Consumables or Test Details. Reports – This option is used to view Patient Reports, Statistical data using Test Statistics screen, the test results on Result Reprint screen, calibration of a test over a period of time on Calibration Trace screen, Calibration Monitor screen with current calibration, errors reported (during sample run, service, maintenance, and auto-startup) in Error Log screen, Reaction curves, Reagent consumption and ISE calibration details. Master – This option is used to define miscellaneous parameters like Area (location of collecting samples), Laboratory, Doctor, Analyst, Manufacturer, Reference range, Unit, Calculation formula and Instrument (for offline result entry) details. Utility – This option is used to define Reagent Positions and Backup Data, to enter and print Offline Results and recalculate the results obtained from analyzer. Service Check – Only the authorized Service Personnel should use this option. Maintenance – This option is used to perform various maintenance operations on analyzer, dead volume calibration for sample and reagent, ISE maintenance activities. The automatic maintenance on startup and shut-down of analyzer can be initiated from this screen. Settings – This option is used to define system parameters, carryover pairs, test sequence, rerun flags, to assign user rights. This option is also used to establish the communication between the analyzer PC and host computer (LIS) using Host Settings screen. Archive – This option is used to archive patient results and view the Archived data at a later date. This option will be visible only after the patient data exceeds the defined threshold limits for the first time, requiring to archive the data. Refer Operator Manual for details. Shut Down – This option is used to turn off the application software with / without maintenance of analyzer. The menus can also be accessed using the keyboard shortcut keys shown in brackets.
6-62
Service Manual
XL-200
The selected menu option will be displayed in yellow color. Following screenshot shows list of Common buttons used:
A – Moves to First Record. B – Moves to Previous Record. C – Moves to Next Record. D – Moves to Last Record. E – Prints the Screen Details in Report Format. F – Saves a new Entry or Modified Entry. G – Clears the data on the current screen. H – Edit or modify the data on the current screen. I – Deletes the Record. Following is a three dotted button available on most of the screens. This button is to be clicked either to select or enter data for that text box. For example: In the screenshot below, button is placed near a box with caption ‘Area’. If this button is clicked, small window opens up for selecting a particular area.
Following is an indication bar available on most of the screens. This provides help or warning messages to the user.
NOTE: The sign * near any of the fields on the software screens indicate that the field is mandatory. The sign ** near any of the column in the master option indicate that row is a default row and can’t be deleted by the user.
6-63
Service Manual
XL-200
6.8. Display Language Settings The display language can be changed according to your choice from the available list of languages. MultiXL application uses this language in dialog boxes, menus, captions, header in the screen, and other items in the user interface. To change the language, do the following: 1. Click on the Settings from the main menu. 2. Now go to System Parameter s screen, and click on the three dotted button available on the Default Language text box.
On clicking, the Change Language dialog box will be displayed. 3. Select the desired language from the Set Language drop down list.
4. Click OK. The captions on the screen will appear in the selected language. Alternatively, language can also be changed using F10 key from the keyboard.
6-64
Service Manual
XL-200
7. Relocation This section provides instructions for decontaminating, draining out the analyzer, disconnecting peripheral devices and packing the analyzer securely for transportation, and is intended for use by only by Transasia trained Service Engineer.
7.1. Tools and Materials Required for Packing the Analyzer Base pallet with “Z” bracket and standard wooden box Cardboard boxes for the accessories Protective Packing material like a bubble sheet, or foam “Z “brackets with nuts, bolts and washers XL-200 standard tool kit Sodium hypochlorite Disposable paper tissues Gloves 5.25% SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE (BLEACH SOLUTION) Four black stopper caps and a white semitransparent big cap required for
the analyzer rear outlets
7.2. Uninstalling and De-contaminating the System 1. From the Maintenance - Wash Menu, perform a cuvette rinse cycle by clicking on the CUVETTE Wash button. 2. Take a printout or a backup on a floppy, hard drive or CD, of the database. You can perform the Backup operation by clicking on Utility – Backup/Restore. Take a Backup of the database by selecting the database from the drop down box. 3. Remove and discard, all Sample cups and Reagent bottles old and new (DO NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE ANALYZER). 4. Remove the Cleaning solution and DI water cans, along with their external associated tubing’s and discard them in regulation with the local law (DO NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE ANALYZER). 5. Drain the system as follows, Click on the MAINTENANCE - WASH button, click on the CUVETTE RINSE button, and perform an entire cuvette rinse. Repeat this cuvette rinse cycle multiple times till all the water from the Pressure Vessel and associated tubes have been drained out.
7-1
Service Manual
XL-200
6. Remove the Hydraulics panel of the analyzer and locate the drain nut and tube, place the drain tube into a shallow container and open the drain nut, and allow the entire contents of the pressure vessel to drain out. After completing the draining procedure DO NOT FORGET TO CLOSE THE DRAIN VALVE. 7. Put the Stopper caps onto the Biohazards waste, cleaning solution and DI water outlet and the white semitransparent big cap onto the waste outlet that is located on the rear of the analyzer. 8. Turn off the power to the Analyzer, computer, monitor and printer. 9. Remove the Waste and Bio Hazardous waste cans, and discard them in regulation with the local law (DO NOT SHIP THEM BACK WITH THE ANALYZER). 10. Disconnect all external cables and peripheral devices. 11. Wipe the Trolley, Monitor, Computer and Keyboard external surface with a nonabrasive cleaner, or a use a soft lint free clot moistened with a 0.5% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) solution to clean and decontaminate the trolley, computer, monitor and printer external surface. 12. But before using it, make sure that you test it on a small section of the trolley and Computer, wait till it dries, see the results, only if you are satisfied that there is no damage or change of color to plastic parts, then proceed to clean the entire Computer and Trolley with this cleaning solution. 13. Adequately pack all the cables, Power cord, and peripheral devices into the accessories box. 14. Lift and remove the Sample and Reagent tray carousel, with the help of a soft brush and a lint free clot moistened in a 0.5 % dilution of a 5.25 % Sodium hypo chloride (bleach) solution clean and decontaminate the Sample and reagent tray, also remove all debris and spillage from the wells of the Sample and Reagent trays, dry and pack them individually, and appropriately into cardboard boxes. 15. Remove the RCT cover gently & locate the thumb screws on top of the reaction tray, unscrew and gently lift the numbering plate, below this locate the three CSK screws, unscrew and lift the reaction tray, place it on a table. 16. Remove each individual cuvette from their slots, making sure they do not get scratched, place them in a bowl containing a warm laboratory detergent (Recommended is a 1% solution of Extran). 17. Rinse the cuvettes thoroughly with DI water, dry them and place them in their original boxes that were supplied with them. 18. Clean the empty Reaction tray and incubation well with the help of a soft brush and lint free clot soaked in a diluted solution of 15% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochlorite, dried them and fit the reaction tray with the cover back in place
7-2
Service Manual
XL-200
19. Remove the Probe and place them into a beaker or test tube filled with a mild Sodium Hypochlorite or Extran solution, the level of the solution should be such that only the lower two centimeters of the probe is in contact with the solution. 20. The Probe system comprises of two metal concentric probes that are used for liquid level sensing. In order to clean this probe from the outside, soak a tissue paper in 5.0% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) , and wrap it around the probes upper end, then gently slide the tissue paper down towards the tip and out of the probe, repeat this cycle numerous times until you are satisfied that the probe is thoroughly cleaned . Make sure that this cleaning procedure is done only in one direction that is from top to down and not in the reverse. Repeat the same procedure with DI water in order to clean the sample probe internally, gently with the help of a syringe flush the probe first with a 5.0% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) and then flush it multiple times with de-ionized water. 21. Rotate the Probe and lower it into the Sample tray. 22. To decontaminate the Stirrer paddle, soak a tissue paper in 5.0% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochlorite (Bleach) , and wrap it around the probes upper end, then gently slide the tissue paper down towards the tip and out of the probe, repeat this cycle numerous times until you are satisfied that the probe is thoroughly cleaned . Make sure that this cleaning procedure is done only in one direction that is from top to down and not in the reverse. 23. Repeat the same procedure with DI water. 24. Unscrew the metal thumbscrew located above the cuvette rinsing unit plate lift the cuvette rinsing unit upwards and place it in a shallow tray. 25. Clean individual probes with the help of a lint free tissue moistened with a 0.5% dilution of a 5.25% Sodium Hypochlorite rinse thoroughly with de-ionized water and dry. 26. Refit the Cuvette rinsing unit and place a buffer packing material between the top plate of the rinsing unit and the top plate of the analyzer.
7-3
Service Manual
XL-200
7.3. Packing the Analyzer Pack the analyzer carefully; otherwise you can damage the accurately adjusted optical and electronic assemblies.
Biohazard: Various Bio hazardous contaminated parts exists in a analyzer that has been used, proper precaution should be taken to protect oneself when relocating the analyze , as well as the decontamination procedures should be properly carried out as per the recommended procedures listed under section 7.2 Uninstalling and Decontaminating the System.
Biohazard: The sample probe comes directly in contact with human sera and is highly bio-hazardous; please take the necessary precaution to protect yourself when carrying out this procedure.
Biohazard: When carrying out this procedure, sufficient precaution should be taken to protect you from potential injury or infection.
NOTE: Any analyzer spares being shipped back, that has had Bio hazardous material run on it, must be decontaminated, and the decontamination certificate that has been included under section 7.4 Certificate of Decontamination, must be filled, duly signed, and attached with the shipping documents. 1. Wrap the plastic protective sheet, around the entire analyzer. 2. Place the base pallet just besides the analyzer. 3. Lift the analyzer and place it over the palate. The front side of the analyzer should be at the front side of the palate (front side marked on the pallet). 4. Slide in all four “Z “ brackets, making sure that they fit into the groove provided on the chassis near the analyzer legs, bolt down the “Z” brackets onto the wooden pallet. 5. Place the top, front & bottom corner buffer at the corner of the analyzer and use the packing strap along with the plastic corners to tie the corner buffers. 6. Place the side buffer and put the corrugated box (both end open) to hold the complete packing, put bubble sheet inside the box and place the corrugated
7-4
Service Manual
XL-200
box tray to close the packing. Use one side packing tape to fix the corrugated box tray with corrugated box (both end open). 7. Insert the wooden box from the top of the analyzer packing to complete the packing and fasten the nut bolt with the pallet. 8. Put the stickers like fragile indication; do not tumble; do not stack on top this box, protect from sunlight and rain, precession instrument. 9. Copy of the certificate of decontamination.
7.4. Decontamination Certificate TO WHOMSOEVER IT MAY CONCERN, THIS ANALYZER ALONG WITH ITS RELATED ACCESSORIES HAS BEEN INSPECTED AND DECONTAMINATED IN ACCORDANCE TO THE STIPULATED PROCEDURES LISTED OUT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL, UNDER SECTION 7.2 UNINSTALLING AND DECONTAMINATING THE SYSTEM AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL AND STATE LAWS. INSTRUMENT MODEL: SERIAL NUMBER: DISTRIBUTORS NAME: DISTRIBUTORS ADDRESS:
CITY:
COUNTRY:
CUSTOMERS NAME: CUSTOMERS ADDRESS:
CITY:
COUNTRY:
PROCEDURES CARRIED OUT BY:
SIGNATURE: DATE:
7-5
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
7-6
Service Manual
XL-200
8. Functional Description This chapter provides the user with necessary background on the analyzer for its use. The user is requested to read before starting operation. This section contains the description of each unit constituting the system.
8.1. Equipment Overview This section provides information on each unit constituting the system.
8.1.1. Identification of the Main Components The XL-200 analyzer consist of the following main components:
Figure 8-1. XL-200 analyzer
8-1
Service Manual
XL-200
Sample and Reagent Pipette Unit (SRPT)
Stirrer
Auto Sampler Unit (ASP)
Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU)
Reaction Cuvette Tray (RCT)
Reagent Tray (RGT)
Figure 8-2. ISE reagent pack
Main On/Off Switch USB Port Main Supply Port
8-3 Power supply connector (on the left hand side)
8-2
Service Manual
XL-200
8.2. Functionality of Each Unit 8.2.1. Auto Sampler Unit (ASP) The auto sampler unit (ASP) consists of a removable turntable with sample tube adaptor and rotating mechanism with a bar code reader for identifying samples. The ASP tray can accommodates: 30 barcoded sample tubes of 5, 7, and 10 ml 9 non-barcoded cups of 2 ml
The types of usable sample tubes are shown below
The sample is aspirated by the Sample & Reagent Pipette Unit (SRPT) and dispensed into cuvettes of the Reaction Tray Unit (RCT).
8-3
Service Manual
XL-200
The ASP tray of the analyzer consists of three rows: Outer Middle Inner
The outer and middle row has total 30 positions that are used for placing Patient’s or Emergency samples. Sample tubes as well as 2 ml cups could be placed in these two rows. The inner row has 9 positions for placing Blank, Control, Standards and Calibrators. Patients and Emergency samples can also be placed in these locations in 2 ml cups, if required. Only 2 ml Sample cups or 500 µl STD cups can be placed in the positions marked as I1 to I9.
Figure 8-4. Auto sampler unit (ASP)
Figure 8-5. ASP tray
8-4
Service Manual
XL-200
8.3. Sample and Reagent Pipette Unit The sample & reagent pipette unit (SRPT) consists of a probe, up-and-down movement mechanism, rotating mechanism, liquid level sensor and probe down limit sensor. The sample and reagent pipette is connected to the syringe pump for sample aspiration via PTFE tube. The sample or reagent on the ASP unit or RGT tray is aspirated by the pipette and then dispensed into the cuvettes (reaction cells) in the RCT unit. Probe has smooth finish surface from outside is passivated and polished from inside to minimize any sample carry over. When an optional ISE unit is fitted and the ISE measurement is performed, the SRPT aspirates sample for ISE measurement and dispenses it into the sample port of the ISE unit.
Figure 8-6. SRPT unit
8.3.1. Liquid Level Sensor (LLS) When the tip of the probe reaches and touches the sample surface, the electrostatic capacitance of the metallic probe varies. The variation of the capacitance is detected and consequently the level of sample is detected.
8.3.2. Probe Down Limit Sensor When the tip of the probe hits the bottom during any of the downwards movement due to the obstruction, the lower limit sensor detects the tip of the probe hits the bottom and stops its downward movement (Vertical obstruction detection or VOD).
8.3.3. SRPT Washing Station The wash station for the sample & reagent probe consists of a two position used as Drain Position” (for internal cleaning of the probe) and as “Trough Position” (for external cleaning of the probe). After the sample & reagent probe has dispensed sample & reagent 1 or reagent 2 into the cuvette, the arm moves to the drain station where the chase volume is dispensed & then moves to trough position
8-5
Service Manual
XL-200
where it is cleaned internally as well as externally using a jet of DI Water at approx 40º C & 0.8 -1.2 bar pressure.
8.3.4. Sample Barcode Reader The barcode reader reads barcode of the label affixed on the outer surface of the sample tube. When the reader does not read the barcode even if the bar code label exists, the appropriate error message is indicated. The readable bar codes are as follows: Symbol
Valid character and symbol
NW-7
Numerals (0 – 9), symbols (-, $, /, +)
Code39
Numerals (0 – 9), alphabetical characters, symbols (-, space, $, /, +, %)
ITF
Numerals only (0 – 9)
UPC
Numerals only (0 – 9)
Code128:
All ASCII code characters [numerals (0 – 9), alphabetical characters (uppercase/lowercase), symbols, control characters]
Set A, Set B, Set C
Resolution of the barcode label should be 0.25mm. Length of the barcode should be 42mm and width should be 10mm. Number of digits should be between 3 to 18 but the combination of digit and type should be within the specified length of the barcode label.
8.4. Reagent Tray (RGT) The Reagent tray (RGT) consists of Transasia reagent tray (reagent bottle tray), barcode reader, cooler, sensor and rotating mechanism. The reagent tray of the RGT can accommodate 50 Reagent bottles with big and small type of containers. The reagent tray rotates and the required reagent bottle is moved to the position where the reagent is aspirated. At this position, the reagent is aspirated by the Sample & reagent pipetting unit and then dispensed into cuvettes in the RCT unit.
8-6
Service Manual
XL-200
Figure 8-7. Reagent tray unit
Figure 8-8. Reagent tray with reagent bottles
8.4.1. Type of Reagent Bottles The reagent bottles are available in two types. The reagent tray on the RGT can accommodate 50 reagent bottles. The type of usable reagent bottles are shown below: 1. Big, (50 ml) 2. Small (20 ml for outer bottles). The Reagent bottles provided with the analyzer are shown below.
8-7
Service Manual
XL-200 20 ml bottle
50 ml bottle
Figure 8-9. Reagent bottles
All bottles are screw capped to prevent evaporation of reagents while not in use. Total 50 bottles can be placed (25 numbers of 50ml and 25 numbers of 20ml). Barcode reader affixes barcoded labels on the reagent containers for identification.
8.4.2. Reagent Bar Code Reader The barcode reader reads barcode of the label affixed on the outer surface of the reagent bottle. Resolution of the barcode label should be 0.25 mm. The readable bar codes are as follows: Symbol
Valid character and symbol
ITF
Numerals only (0 – 9)
8.4.3. RGT Cooling Unit Even if the analyzer is turned off (by analyzer’s ON/OFF switch located on the right side of the analyzer, the temperature inside the RGT unit is kept within the specified limits by the Peltier element which is controlled by temperature controller.
8-8
Service Manual
XL-200
8.5. Reaction Tray (RCT) The reaction tray (RCT) consists of the cuvette ring set and rotating mechanism. RCT is provided with 45 hard glass cuvettes (5mm * 5mm) on its outer circumference and the temperature inside is kept at 37ºC (+/- 0.2ºC) constantly. The cuvettes are moved at 10-second step and a series of process including dispensation, stirring, photometric measurement and washing be performed.
Cuvettes
Figure 8-10. Reaction tray
NOTE: To improve the efficiency of the photometer, the RCT tray will automatically come to offset position (such that the beam falls in between two consecutive cuvettes) on the following conditions: * After the end of batch run * When the batch run is manually terminated from Status Monitor by user * When the batch run terminated due to occurrence of any emergency error.
8-9
Service Manual
XL-200
8.6. Pipette Pump Assembly There is one syringe pump of 500 μl capacity for both reagents as well as sample. The syringe pump of the analyzer is modular type by which it aspirates & dispenses volumes between 2 μl to 300 μl. Sample volumes can be increased in steps of 0.1 μl. The syringe is located behind the front plate of the analyzer and connected to the probe using appropriate tubing.
Figure 8-11. Sample and reagent syringe assembly (Sapphire)
8.7. Mixing Stirrer Unit The mixing stirrer unit (STIRRER) consists of the up-and-down mechanism and the paddle rotating mechanism. The sample and the primary reagent dispensed into cuvettes are stirred by rotating the paddle at requested speed of high, low or medium. The paddle is washed in the STIRRER trough with system water at 37 ºC – 41 ºC and pressure of 0.8-1.2 bar. The secondary reagent dispensed into the cuvettes is stirred by rotating the paddle at requested speed of high, low or medium. The paddle is again washed in the STIRRER trough with system water at 37 ºC – 41 ºC and pressure of 0.8-1.2 bar.
8-10
Service Manual
XL-200
Figure 8-12. Stirrer unit
8.8. Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU) The Cuvette Rinsing Unit (CRU) serves the purpose of washing the inner surface of the cuvettes in which the measurement of specimen have been completed and allow them to be reused. The CRU consists of 8 probes, probes 1 to 6 are in pairs (one for dispensing and the other one for aspirating), followed by a single probe for final aspiration and the last probe attached with a drier serves the purpose of drying the cuvettes. The cuvette washing via the CRU takes place in 8 stages as described below: Probe 1 – Aspirates the bio hazardous waste and dispenses cleaning solution. Probe 2 to 6 - Aspirates the cuvette contents, and dispenses deionized water. Probe 7 - Aspirates the cuvette content. Probe 8 - Dries the reaction cuvette.
Figure 8-13. Cuvette rinsing unit
8-11
Service Manual
XL-200
8.9. Photometer Unit The photometer unit consists of the optical measurement system having narrow bandwidth, wavelength specific filters with light source. The absorbance inside the cuvette is measured by using a photometer. Measurement is performed with any combinations of 2 wavelengths selected among the following 8 wavelengths: 340 nm, 405 nm, 505 nm, 546 nm, 578 nm, 600nm, 660 nm, and 700 nm
8-12
Service Manual
XL-200
The photometer consists of an illuminant (halogen lamp), lenses, optical filter and photoreceptor (photodiode). The light passed through cuvette (reaction mixture) is split by beam splitter which in turn passes through wavelength specific filter on to diode. This eliminates several optical interferences and greatly improves the efficiency of the photometer.
Figure 8-14. Photometer unit
8-13
Service Manual
XL-200
8.10. Liquid Level Sensing for Cans The Liquid Level Sensor are placed inside the respective Cans of DI water, Cleaning solution, Bio-hazardous waste & normal waste Can. Accordingly, for DI water & cleaning solution, the float based level sensors will sense the low level of DI water or cleaning solution & respective LED will lit on the instrument with the beep sound. Similarly, full levels are detected for both the waste can & respective LEDs are lit accordingly with beep sound. All the LEDS are placed just near to the tube connection for the same cans.
Float Sensor for Diluted Waste Can
Float Sensor for DI Water Can
Float Sensor for Biohazard Waste Can
Float Sensor for Detergent Can
Figure 8-15. Liquid level sensors
8.11. Ion Selective Electrode Unit (ISE) 4-Channel The ISE module measures the concentration of Li+, Na+, K+, and Cl- in serum, plasma and diluted urine. This unit is located inside the analyzer on the left hand side. This unit is optionally supplied with the analyzer. The ISE unit consists of ISE module, ion electrodes, supply and drain pump.
ISE Electrodes
Waste Pump CAL B
CAL A
8-14
Service Manual
XL-200
ISE module
This module unit is fitted with electrodes (Na, K, Cl, Li & Reference) and controls pumps, measurement of concentration by electrodes and rinsing movement. Communication to the analyzer is carried out through RS232C.
Ion electrode
This unit consists of Na, K, Cl, Reference and Li electrodes. The Reagent pack for Calibrant-A & Calibrant-B is placed on the top cover. Dedicated wash solution are placed in the ASP unit and wash solution is supplied by the SRPT in the same way as for the sample.
Supply pump
These pumps are performs the infusing of Calibrant-A and CalibrantB into ISE module.
Drain pump
This pump performs the transferring of liquid in ISE module.
The following solutions are requested for the ISE unit:
8.11.1.1. Calibrant-A Calibrant-A is used at the time of one-point calibration. The one-point calibration is carried out at the same time when the Calibrant-A is dispensed to wash electrodes every time the sample measurement is performed. 100µl of Calibrant-A is automatically dispensed into the ISE unit every 30 minutes to prevent the electrode from drying during standby cycle.
8.11.1.2. Calibrant-B Calibrant-B is used at the time of two-point calibration. The two-point calibration should be carried out at the beginning of the day and at least once every 8 hours or after completion of 50 samples.
8.11.1.3. Cleaning Solution The Cleaning solution needs to be dispensed into the unit to avoid deposition of protein on the electrodes. As necessary, 500µl of the wash solution is dispensed into a sample cup and it is placed on position of the ASP tray. This function should be carried out twice a day, once in the beginning of the day before the Calibration and at the end of day. When more than 50 samples of measurement are carried out, washing must be carried out.
8.11.1.4. Diluents Ddiluents are used to dilute urine to one-tenth in concentration. It is placed in a reagent bottle that is placed in the RGT unit at the user defined position. The necessary volume for diluting one sample is 200µl. The dilution is carried out using a cuvette in the RCT unit and therefore one cycle of chemistry analysis is allocated to this processing.
8-15
Service Manual
XL-200
Sampling volume at each measurement In the case of analytic measurement
Sample Volume for Serum 70 µl
In the case of full calibration
Calibrant-A: 180µl, Calibrant-B: 180µl
In the case of 1-point calibration (Serum cycle)
Calibrant-A: 180µl
In the case of 1-point calibration (Urine cycle)
Calibrant-B: 230µl
Sample Volume for Urine 140 µl
Calibrant-A: 100µl
8-16
Service Manual
XL-200
9. Electronic Circuit Description This chapter provides functional details of various electronic assemblies and Components are being used.
9.1. CPU Board: ELS62012/R4 A field-programmable gate array is a semiconductor device containing programmable logic components called "logic blocks", and programmable interconnects. Logic blocks can be programmed to perform the function of basic logic gates such as AND and XOR or more complex combinational functions such as decoders or mathematical functions. In most FPGAs, the logic blocks also include memory elements, which may be simple flip-flops or more complete blocks of memory. A hierarchy of programmable interconnects allows logic blocks to be interconnected as needed by the system designer, somewhat like a one-chip programmable breadboard. Logic blocks and interconnects can be programmed by the customer or designer, after the FPGA is manufactured, to implement any logical function—hence the name "field-programmable". HDL source file is transferred to the FPGA/CPLD via a serial interface (JTAG) or to an external memory device like an EEPROM. In CPU PCB Assy Xilinx’s – Spartan 3E family FPGA (Field -Programmable gate array) is being used to get a solution in the low-cost high-volume core logic market. Developed to provide the optimal balance of low cost and high value features. Below mentioned are the Features of Xilinx Spartan – 3E family FPGA Delivers lowest total cost. Industry’s largest selection of device/package options. Industry’s most comprehensive IP library. Leading embedded and DSP solutions. Efficient, cost-effective board designs. Allows use of fewer standard components. Increased system reliability by eliminating external components.
Low-cost Embedded Processing platform. Integrate MicroBlaze soft processor into FPGA and reduce BOM Reduce obsolescence risks with soft processors Reduce inventory cost by using common flexible Embedded processing
architecture across multiple products
9-1
Service Manual
XL-200
Reduced power rail count means fewer power regulators and lower cost
regulators due to more tolerant Vcc specifications.
True 3.3V I/O result in high noise tolerance with no external input buffers. LVCMOS and LVTTL drive strength eliminate the need for signal output
buffers and line drivers.
Due to digital implementation of DCM, fewer external components are
required.
Block Diagram of Spartan – 3E FPGA as follows:
9-2
Service Manual
XL-200
A flexible micro blaze system architecture enables you to effectively achieve four product goals: Reduce overall product cost Achieve performance targets Eliminate risk of obsolescence Use industry-standard software development frameworks for productivity
Spartan – 3E Architecture The FPGA is an integrated circuit that contains many (64 to over 10,000) identical logic cells that can be viewed as standard components. Each logic cell can independently take on any one of a limited set of personalities. The individual cells are interconnected by a matrix of wires and programmable switches. A user's design is implemented by specifying the simple logic function for each cell and selectively closing the switches in the interconnect matrix. The array of logic cells and interconnects form a fabric of basic building blocks for logic circuits. Complex designs are created by combining these basic blocks to create the desired circuit. The logic cell architecture varies between different device families. Generally speaking, each logic cell combines a few binary inputs (typically between 3 and 10) to one or two outputs according to a Boolean logic function specified in the user program. In most families, the user also has the option of registering the combinatorial output of the cell, so that clocked logic can be easily implemented. The cell's combinatorial logic may be physically implemented as a small look-up table memory (LUT) or as a set of multiplexers and gates. LUT devices tend to be a bit more flexible and provide more inputs per cell than multiplexer cells at the expense of propagation delay. Field Programmable means that the FPGA's function is defined by a user's program rather than by the manufacturer of the device. A typical integrated circuit performs a particular function defined at the time of manufacture. In contrast, the FPGA's function is defined by a program written by someone other than the device manufacturer. Depending on the particular device, the program is either ‘burned’ in permanently or semi-permanently as part of a board assembly process, or is loaded from an external memory each time the device is powered up. This user programmability gives the user access to complex integrated designs without the high engineering costs associated with application specific integrated circuits. Individually defining the many switch connections and cell logic functions would be a daunting task. Fortunately, this task is handled by special software. The software translates a user's schematic diagrams or textual hardware description language code then places and routes the translated design. Most of the software packages have hooks to allow the user to influence implementation, placement and routing to obtain better performance and utilization of the device. Libraries of more complex function macros (e.g. adders) further simplify the design process by providing common circuits that are already optimized for speed or area.
9-3
Service Manual
XL-200
9-4
Service Manual
XL-200
CPU Pcb assy. Signal details. as shown above. CPU PCB Assy consisted of following interfaces to achieve End task. A) Spartan 3E – XC3S1200E – FG320: 320-ball Fine-pitch Ball Grid Array XC3S1200E – BGA package is having Input/output ports 250 nos. (56 nos. are only Input ports) & Differential 99 nos. (12 nos. are only input ports). At Power ON Program from Micro blaze has been loaded in to Flash Memory M2516P.The flow of the signals are that Application is sending an instruction to Micro blaze. Micro blaze is decoded that instruction & send command to FPGA to complete task i.e. Motion profile to all motors of interfaces. FPGA is interfaced with SRAM IDT71V416VS10PH/ISSI61LV25616AL. Response from Interfaces through opto is read back to take next action. Calibration of interfaces is being stored in to EEPROM AT24C1024. USB interface between PC’s USB port & M/c is being established with the help of USB – UART Bridge Controller CP2102.
9-5
Service Manual
XL-200
CLK 50 MHz to FPGA is generated with the help U5 Crystal Oscillator – Epson SG – 8002CA monitored at TP3 w.r.t. GND.
It is 256K X 16 bits (4MB bit RAM) High Speed Asynchronous SRAM working on 3V3 power supply. It is being used to download FPGA code in to RAM at Power ON to interface as per instruction from Micro blaze to process task. C) Flash Memory: M25P16: It is 16Mbit Serial flash Memory with 50MHz SPI interface. Micro blaze Program code is being downloaded in to Flash Memory during Power ON. SPI interface is established between Micro blaze & Application software through Flash Memory with SPI interface. D:
Data Input pulses to be monitored at TP11.
CLK: CLK to Flash Ram to be monitored at TP9. S:
Chip select to be monitored at TP10.
Q:
Output of flash Ram is to be monitored at TP12.
9-6
Service Manual
XL-200
D) EEPROM: AT24C1024 It is 1 M bits two wire Serial EEPROM SCL is a CLK input & SDA is Data. Calibration data of interfaces are being stored in to EEPROM. During next operation interfaces will behave as per updated data. E) Power Supply Section: CPU PCB assy’s interfaces are working on +3.3V DC, +2.5V DC, +1.2V DC. 1. +3.3 V DC: +5V VCC as an input supply at TP1 to IC U1 – LD1085 – Pin3: Low drop positive voltage regulator. Output voltage 3V3 DC at Pin2 of U1 (+/-2%) to be monitored at TP2 w.r.t. GND TP4, indicated by LED D1. 3V3 as VCCO connected to Xilinx FPGA. 2. +2.5 V DC: +5V VCC as an input supply at TP1 to IC U2 – LD1117 25 – Pin3: Low drop positive voltage regulator. Output voltage 2V5 DC at Pin2 of U2 (+/-2%) to be monitored at TP5 w.r.t. GND TP4, indicated by LED D2. 2V5 as VCCAUX connected to Xilinx FPGA. 3. +1.2 V DC: +5V VCC as an input supply at TP6 to IC U3 – LD1085 – Pin3: Low drop positive voltage regulator. Output voltage 1V2 DC at Pin2 of U3 (+/- 2%) to be monitored at TP7 w.r.t. GND TP8. 1V2 as VCCINT connected to Xilinx FPGA. Following Functions are carried out with the help of CPU PCB ASSY: 1. Generate Clock /Direction signals to drive the stepper motors 2. Generate signals to drive the Valves/Pumps, stirrer DC motors 3. Read liquid level isolated signals & generate error signals accordingly. 4. Read opto isolator signals generated from interfaces. 5. Serial communication with RGT temp. Controller to monitor RGT Temperature, RCT controller to control RCT temp. at 37 +/- 0.2 °C, Barcode scanners, PC communication, Photometer communications.
9-7
Service Manual
XL-200
6. JTAG programming to the SPARTAN-3E: To Down load Program files in to FPGA & Microblaze. a. Shorting link JP2 : Pin 1 & 2 : Short b. Shorting link JP5 : Pin 2 & 3 : Short Location: CPU PCB ASSY – ELS 62012R4 is located as Piggyback on Interface Board Mounted on Rear Door. Ref.: Silkscreen layout of Top - SST of CPU PCB ELS62012R4.
Ref.: Silkscreen layout of Bottom - SST of CPU PCB ELS62012R4.
9-8
Service Manual
XL-200
9.2. Interface Board: ELS62009/R7.1 Interface PCB assy is an interface between CPU PCB assy & Devices. The Interface board accommodates, 1. Stepper Motor Driver: Stepper motor driver section including ten stepper motor drivers. It accepts two signals to operate i) Clock ii) Direction from CPU board and drives the stepper motors. a. SPT Tray: U48 - A3979 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor. CLK is at pin 19 of U48, Direction signal at Pin3 of U48. Shorting link J70: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J41 : Output for Motor b. R1 Syringe: U57 - A3979 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor. CLK is at pin 19 of U57, Direction signal at Pin3 of U57. Shorting link J73: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J48 : Output for Motor c. Stirrer Arm Rotation: U56 - A3979 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor. CLK is at pin 19 of U56, Direction signal at Pin3 of U56. Shorting link J72: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J46 : Output for Motor d. RGT Tray Motor: U58 - A3979 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor. CLK is at pin 19 of U58, Direction signal at Pin3 of U58. Shorting link J69: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J50 : Output for Motor
9-9
Service Manual
XL-200
e. CRU ARM: U54 - A3977 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor in half step mode. CLK is at pin 19 of U54, Direction signal at Pin3 of U54. Shorting link J68: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J47 : Output for Motor f. RCT Rotation: U51 - A3979 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor. CLK is at pin 19 of U51, Direction signal at Pin3 of U51. Shorting link J75: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J45 : Output for Motor g. ARM UP/DN: U49 - A3979 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor. CLK is at pin 19 of U49, Direction signal at Pin3 of U49. Shorting link J74: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J40 : Output for Motor h. ARM Rotation: U50 - A3979 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor. CLK is at pin19 of U50, Direction signal at Pin3 of U50. Shorting link J55: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J42 : Output for Motor i.
Stirrer Arm UP/DN: U53 - A3977 Stepper Motor Driver is used to Drive Stepper Motor in half step mode. CLK is at pin 19 of U53, Direction signal at Pin3 of U53. Shorting link J67: ON: Enable motor drive. OFF: Disable motor drive J44 : Output for Motor NOTE: DO NOT remove motor connector in Power ON. Jumper J15 : Pin 2 & 3 Close , for Stepper motor drive A3977 for Arm UP/DN,CRU UP/DN, Stirrer UP/DN motor drivers J15: Pin 2&3 Open: Stepper motor drivers are A3979.
2. DC Valve Driver: DC drive section, it accepts logic signals from CPU board and turn ON/OFF the DC valve/pump. Logic Signals from CPU PCB are opto isolated Drive 24V DC valves through NPN Transistor Array Driver ULN2003 – U10. Connector J5: Detergent Pump: LED D5: Will indicate the status. Connector J6: Bio-hazard Pump: LED D7: Will indicate the status. Connector J7: Sapphire Syringe CKD valve: LED D9: Will indicate the status. Connector J10: Buzzer output for Error. LED D50: will indicate the status. 3. AC Valve Driver: AC driver section is used to drive the 100V AC valves.
9-10
Service Manual
XL-200
Logic signals from the CPU board are opto isolated with Zero crossing & Triac T1235 to turn ON/OFF the valves. The flow of the logic input signals is from the Interface board to CPU board. The flow of the output signals is from Interface board AC Drive section to valves. All logic signals from OPTO’s, buffered & given to CPU board. 100V AC input power voltage from Transformer secondary is being connected through Fuse F1 – 1A to J1 Pin1 : L , Pin2 : N a. ARM Trough valve : J1 : Pin 3, 4: Logic signal drive through Transistor Q1 to cathode of Opto isolator with Zero crossing detector – MOC3041 – U1 to Gate of TRIAC T1235 U2. Output of TRIAC will drive ARM Trough Valve. b. Cuvette Overflow Valve: J2: Pin 1, 2: Logic signal drive through Transistor Q2 to cathode of Opto isolator with Zero crossing detector – MOC3041 – U3 to Gate of TRIAC T1235 U4. Output of Triac will Drive Cuvette Overflow valve. c. DI-Water DISP. Valve: J3: Pin 1, 2: Logic signal drive through Transistor Q3 to Gate of Opto isolator with Zero crossing detector – MOC3041- U5 to Gate of TRIAC T1235 U6. Output of TRIAC will Drive DI water Dispense valve. d. Stirrer Trough valve : J4 : Pin1, 2: Logic signal drive through Transistor Q4 to Gate of Opto isolator with Zero crossing detector – MOC3041 – U7 to Gate of Triac T1235 U8 . Output of TRIAC will drive Stirrer Valve. 4. Stirrer Motor Driver: The Stirrer motor driver section, CPU board gives logic signals corresponding to require speed, with the help of “Frequency to voltage converter circuit”. Output voltage to Stirrer motor is proportional to Input frequency, located on the stirrer arm. U59 used as Frequency to Voltage converter J51: To Stirrer Motor for Low, Medium, High Speed. 5. RCT Heater: The RCT Heater section incorporate micro controller C8051F314 – U22 which reads the digital signal proportional to the reaction tray temperature and maintains the reaction tray temperature at 37 °C, +/0.2°C. Three digital sensors DS18B20+ located in the RCT Heater assembly are the inputs of heater temperature to this controller. Micro controller drives heaters H1- J24, H2 - J25, H3 – J20 located in the RCT heater Assy. PWM L298 is being used to control heater. U24: Heater1, U62: Heater 2, U20: Heater 3. Sensor Input is connected at Connector J23. Connector J10 is being used to Program Microcontroller U22 through JTAG. LED D20, D22, D23 will be showing status of Sensor. If sensor gets open then respective LED will start flashing. Heater ON/OFF status will be indicated with the help of LED’s D21 – Heater 1, D51: Heater 2, D19: Heater 3.
9-11
Service Manual
XL-200
6. LLC: In the liquid level sensing section the signal sensed through LLC junction board, sent to CPU board & output for error indication taken from CPU board buffered, given to LLC junction board. Connector J9 for LLC Signals from / To CPU PCB. 7. Power Supply: +5V, -5V DC from power supply card to the LLS card through Interface PCB assembly. The flow of Power supply for the LLS is from Interface card through CPU card to LLS PCB assy. Connector J26: LLS Power Supply to LLS PCB Assy Located at ARM routed through Interface card. 8. Pressure Sense: Pressure Sensor is connected to J17 on Interface card. When the pressure goes above 1.2 bar then HI pressure Error will be generated at Pin1 of J17. “HI Pressure error” through U16 – TLP181 Pin4 send to CPU PCB assy. When the pressure goes below 0.8 bar then LO pressure Error will be generated at Pin2 of J17. “LO” Pressure error” through U17 – TLP181 Pin4 sent to CPU PCB assy. Operating range of pressure is 0.8bar to 1.2bar. a. RS232 Communication : i) RCT heater temperature: RCT heater temperature signals from U22 Pin29 & 30 are sent to CPU PCB assy as RCT_HTR_TX, RCT_HTR_RX. ii) Photometer Communication: MAX3232 U34 is used to transmit & receive Photometer data from / to CPU PCB assy. Connector J35 for Photometer communication. Opto 6N137: High Speed optos are being used for Transmit U33 & Receive U35. b. PC Communication: MAX3232 U29 is used to transmit & receive PC data from / to CPU PCB assy. Connector J28 for PC communication. Opto 6N137: High Speed opto are being used for Transmit U30 & Receive U32. c. Barcode Scanner: MAX3232 U31 is used to transmit & receive barcode data from / to CPU PCB for Barcode scanners serial communication. Connector J30: RGT Barcode scanner, J33: Sample Barcode scanner. d. ISE Communication:
9-12
Service Manual
XL-200 MAX3232 U28 is used for ISE serial communication. Connector J27: ISE serial communication from ISE module to transmit & receive ISE data from / to CPU PCB.
Location: Interface PCB Assy – ELS62009R7.1 is located on Base Plate of Rear Panel Door. Ref.: Component Layout Interface PCB Assy – ELS62009R7.1
9.3. Photometer Diode PCB – ELS62014R2 It provides voltage signals proportional to the light intensity for 8 wavelengths. The wave lengths are 340nm, 405nm, 505nm, 546nm, 578nm, 600nm, 660nm, 700nm. Photodiode S1133-01 & Precision Operational Amplifier LMC6082 are being used to convert Photodiode current in to Voltage for measurement of respective wave lengths. This voltage is being sent to Photo signal Processor PCB assy for measurement. It is located inside a special box beside the RCT. The flow of signals is from photometer Diode board to the Photometer signal processing board. Power Supply Check : TP1 : GND
9-13
Service Manual
XL-200
Connector J1 : Pin 10 : +5V ANA Connector J1 : Pin 12 : - 5V ANA Photometer Output Voltage Check : Connector J1 : Pin 1 : 340nm Wave length Connector J1 : Pin 2 : 405nm Wave length Connector J1 : Pin 3 : 505nm Wave length Connector J1 : Pin 4 : 546nm Wave length Connector J1 : Pin 5 : 578nm Wave length Connector J1 : Pin 6 : 600nm Wave length Connector J1 : Pin 7 : 660nm Wave length Connector J1 : Pin 8 : 700nm Wave length Location: Photodiode PCB assy is fixed as a Piggyback on Photo signal PCB assy in Photometer Box.
Photometer Diode PCB ELS62014/R2
9.4. Photometer Signal Processor PCB ELS62013R3 The voltage signals from photo diode PCB taken as an input to the multiplexers to select the primary & secondary wavelength from eight wavelengths. According to the respective Bio - Chemistry & Schedule, it selects the required wavelength signal & processed through micro controller. Microcontroller is built in with two ADC’s for Primary & Secondary wavelengths measurements. The processed data will be sending to the CPU board on serial communication via - interface board. It is located inside a special box below the photometer diode PCB beside the RCT Assy.
9-14
Service Manual
XL-200
Location: Photo signal Processor PCB assy in Photometer Box.
Photometer Signal Processing PCB ELS62013R3 Input Voltage of Respective wave lengths to be measured at Connector J9. Pin1: 340nm Wavelength. Pin2 : 405nm Wavelength Pin3 : 450nm wavelength Pin4 : 505nm Wavelength Pin5 : 546nm Wavelength Pin6 : 578nm Wavelength Pin7 : 660nm Wavelength Pin8 : 700nm Wavelength
Power Supply Voltage : J3 : Pin1 : +5V ANA , TP2 Pin2 : GND ANA, TP4 Pin3: -5V ANA. Pin5 : +5V _DP : TP5 Pin6 : GND : TP6 DP 3V3 _DP - : TP6:- Is derived from U6 LD1117ADT33 is a low drop voltage regulator & being used for Microcontroller / Digital circuit. 3V3 ANA - : TP3: - Is derived from U4 LD1117ADT33 is a low drop voltage regulator & being used for Analog circuit of microcontroller.
9-15
Service Manual
XL-200
Power ON Reset: IC U16 – MAX709S It provides System reset during Power-UP & Power DN conditions. When VCC falls below the Reset, Reset goes Low & hold up to 140ms after Vcc rises above reset threshold. Reset threshold is between 2.85V to 3.00V. Reference voltage 1.25V is generated with the help of U12 Shunt Regulator – 2V5. 1.25V is derived with R26 & R35 as Potential divider from 2V5 Primary Wave length Voltage Measurement flow. U6: DG506A – Multiplexer to select one Wave length from eight wavelengths. U7A : TL072 – Buffer U2 : OP07 – Unity Gain Inverting Amplifier with OFFSET adjustment POT1 – TP10 U1: OP07 – Programmable Gain with OFFSET adjustment POT2 – TP1: This output voltage is sending to ADC input CH1 of Microcontroller. Programmable gain is implemented with Maxim IC U14 - MAX5483 – 10bit , Nonvolatile , Linear Taper Digital Potentiometer controlled by microcontroller C8051F067 - U10 as a Gain resistance of Opamp U1. Secondary Wave length Voltage Measurement flow. U11: DG506A – Multiplexer to select one Wave length from eight wave lengths. U13A : TL072 – Buffer U8: OP07 – Unity Gain Inverting Amplifier with OFFSET adjustment POT3 – TP11 U9: OP07 – Programmable Gain with OFFSET adjustment POT4 – TP7: This output voltage is sending to ADC input CH2 of Microcontroller. Programmable gain is implemented with Maxim IC U15 - MAX5483 – 10bit , Nonvolatile , Linear Taper Digital Potentiometer controlled by microcontroller C8051F067 - U10 as a Gain resistance of Opamp U9. Microcontroller is programmed with the help of Connector J2 – JTAG. Output voltage is converted in to digital output with the help of Built in respective ADC’s of CH1 & CH2 & sends data through serial communication RS232 – MAX3232 U3 at connector J1. J1 – Pin1 – TXD J1 – Pin2 – RXD J1 – Pin3 – GND
9-16
Service Manual
XL-200
9.5. Opto PCB: ELS22006/R3 Opto PCB assy is being used to get feedback of positions of Electro-mechanical assemblies to microcontroller / FPGA to process further action. It provides a logic ‘HIGH’ (+5V) signal when the opto isolator is being interrupted i.e. cut by a mechanical assembly due to motion. Called as SENSE. It provides a logic ‘LOW’ (0V) signal when the opto isolator is uninterrupted i.e. not cut by mechanical assembly due to motion called as ‘NOT SENSE’. The signal is interpreted by respective FPGA. The flow of electrical signal is from Opto PCB › Baseboard1 PCB › Interface PCB. Location: OPTO PCBs are distributed at various electromechanical assemblies in the analyzer that is. RGT, RCT, CRU, ARM, and STIRRER etc. Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & bottom side – SSB of Opto PCB ELS22006R3 Refer to the PCB assy, the details of signals are as follows.CN1: VCC: +5V, Output: SN, GND. Three wires are soldered to respective pads on the solder side, The pad closer to the SMD LED is ground (0V) and the pad to the other extreme is +5V. The center pad is for opto status. It is LOW when the opto is not cut; it is HIGH when the opto is cut.
9-17
Service Manual
XL-200
9.6. Liquid Level Sensing PCB Assy ELS62026R1 / ELS52010R4 The LLS (Liquid Level Sense) circuit is used to detect the level of sample in the Sample cup / test tube & reagent in reagent bottles. To detect vertical obstruction (VOD) of probe mounted on ARM assy in cup, tube, and bottle etc. Opto is being used to generate electrical signal named as ‘VOD’ for respective arm assy & same will be sending to FPGA for further action. The Liquid Level Sense PCB assy – LLS PCB assy is made up of LLS S/H PCB ELS62026R1 & LLS Signal board ELS52010R4. LLS Signal board is mounted on LLS S/H PCB ELS62026R0 with the help of 4 pin SIL Berg strip. LLS out signal is being represented with the help of flashing of LED D3 as probe touches/senses the liquid. Power is supplied to LLS PCB assy through 4 Pin connector J4 as Pin1: +5V, Pin2: GND, Pin3: -5V, Pin4: Unconnected. LLS S/H PCB ELS62026R1: It is being used to generate LLS out signal by converting analog signal in to TTL signal with the of opamp configured as differential amplifier ,in synchronization with Sample & Hold (U3), opamp configured as comparator ,VOD signals. Reference voltage is generated to comparator with the help of D1 – LM385 (2V5 – Shunt regulator- temp. compensated). LLS Signal board ELS52010R4. It is being used as compare delta of Probe capacitor with reference of 100pF. Reference frequency of 32.768 KHz is generated with the help of Crystal & converted in to TTL square wave with Schmitt trigger IC 74HC14. Frequency to voltage is converted with the help of F – V converter IC 2907(U1) & output will be sending to Sample & Hold & Differential amplifier. Probe signal is generated through Probe by connecting wire to probe body & connected to J1 on LLS S/H Board. The method of sensing is capacitive .The function of LLS is Respective ARM Assy is positioned to respective location defined as per RUN. Auto Zero signal is generated by FPGA to reset & buffered with the help of tristate buffer U19A, then arm is moving down towards liquid to sense liquid. Liquid is sensed by probe of sample ARM assy LED D3 flashes. LLS out signal is fed to FPGA. During sensing, traveling of ARM assy, if probe obstruct then VOD signal is being generated to display Error message as “VOD Error”. Manually it can be checked by allowing probe to lift slightly in ‘UP’ direction.
9-18
Service Manual
XL-200
Plate fixed to Arm assy is cut the light path of Opto & change the state vice versa. Arm initialized will encounter the VOD error. The berg strip pin (3) behind the ground pin of 4 pin connector is connected to the output of the signal card. The voltage at this pin (3) WRT ground pin has to be approx. 1.85V with the probe in air. Location: LLS PCB assy is located on the Arm Base of the Sample Arm assembly. Ref.: Figure 14: Silkscreen layout of LLS S/H board ELS62026R1 Top – SST & Bottom side SSB & Silkscreen layout of LLS Signal board ELS52010R4 Top – SST & Bottom side SSB. As per system requirement LLS sense PCB’s, following are the selected components to respective Arm assemblies. Sample Arm: R3, R6: SMD resistor 68K 0.1% 100ppm. R8: SMD resistor 1K5 R9: SMD resistor 1K5 C1: SMD capacitor 22nF. Reference voltage at Pin13 of U2: 1.25V DC Approx.
9-19
Service Manual
XL-200
9.7. Liquid Level Sensing PCB Assy: ELS22036R2.1 The LLS (Liquid Level Sense) circuit is being used to detect the level of sample in the Sample cup / test tube & reagent in reagent bottles. To detect vertical obstruction (VOD) in cup, tube etc. of Probe, opto U6 mounted on ARM assy Opto U6 is being used to generate electrical signal named as ‘VOD’ & same will be sending to FPGA for further action. The Liquid level Sense PCB assy – 455KHZ modulated signal is generated with the help of 455 KHz resonator Y1 & IC U1 – 74HC14. Probe connected at J1 – Pin1: Probe signal, Pin2: GND. IC U3: Quad Opamp TL074 is used as U3A: buffer , U3B : Differ. Amplifier, U3C: Differentiator. When Probe touches to liquid in cup, bottle etc. electrical signal generated with respect to change of capacitance & is being converted to respective DC with Diode D3 ,filter with RC low pass filter , amplified for measurement with the help of U3-B., Differentiated with U3-C. Output of Differentiator will be proportional to RC*change of voltage w.r.t. Time. When Probe touches to liquid Positive peak is generated & from probe travelling from liquid to air negative peak will be generated. Output of Differentiator will be sending for +ve peak detection to U2A wrt. Threshold +1.25V. When output crosses TH. Voltage comparator changes its output. & negative detection to U2B, TH. Voltage: -1.00V. Output of comparator U2 will be sending to Clear / Preset of D – FF U4 synchronized with Auto Zero/LLS Enable as a CLK to D-FF. (JP1: Pin 1 - 2: ON) Output of D-FF is LLS Out signal sending to CPU PCB assy for next action. LLS out visually indicated by LED2. +5V indicated by LED1 as Power ON. J4: Pin1: +5V, Pin2: GND, Pin3: -5V, Pin4: Unconnected. J5:Pin1:Auto Zero/LLS Enable, Pin2:LLS Out, Pin3: VOD OUT Selected Components of LLS PCB Assy are mentioned as below. R19: 15K C9: 4.7µF R11: 330K R13: 3K3 R15: 3K3
9-20
Service Manual
XL-200
Reference voltage at Pin3 of U2: +1.25V DC, -1.25V at Pin6 of U2 Approx. Location: On the ARM ASSY Silk Screen layout of To Layer & Bottom Layer as mentioned below.
9.8. Power Supply Board – ELS62011R3 Linear Power Supply is being used to provide Power supply to Photometer, Liquid level sensing PCB assy, isolated Supply to PC & Photometer serial communication. A) ANALOG Power Supply: +5V ANA, -5V ANA, +5V_DP: For Photometer Assy Transformer secondary output voltage 9-0-9 VAC at connector J1 on Power Supply PCB is being rectified – BR1 & regulated through U1 – TL750M05 (+5V Positive fixed voltage LDO Regulator) TO220 Package to get +5V ANA at TP1 w.r.t. GND TP2 – LED D1 indication for +5V ANA. Rectified voltage regulated through U2 – LM2990T 5.0 (-5V Negative fixed voltage LDO Regulator) TO220 package to get -5V ANA at TP3 w.r.t. GND. LED D2 indication for -5V ANA. B) Digital Power Supply :+5V_DP Transformer secondary output voltage 0-9 VAC at connector J3 on Power Supply PCB is being rectified – BR2 & regulated through U5 – TL750M05 (+5V Positive fixed voltage LDO Regulator) TO220 Package to get +5V _DP at TP5 w.r.t. GND Pin6 of connector J2. Same Power supply is being used for interface card through connector J10. LED D3 indication for +5V_DP. C) LLS Power Supply: +5V, -5V Transformer secondary output voltage 9-0-9 VAC at connector J7 on Power Supply PCB is being rectified – BR3 & regulated through U3 – TL750M05 (+5V
9-21
Service Manual
XL-200
Positive fixed voltage LDO Regulator) TO220 Package to get +5V at TP6- Pin1 of connector J9 w.r.t. GND Pin2 of connector J9 LED D4 indication for +5V Rectified voltage regulated through U4 – 7905 (-5V Negative fixed voltage Regulator) TO220 package to get -5V at TP7 w.r.t. GND pin2 of connector J9. LED D5 indication for -5V D) ISOLATED SUPPLY: +5V_ISO Transformer secondary output voltage 0-9 VAC at connector J4 on Power Supply PCB is being rectified – BR4 & regulated through U6 – TL750M05 (+5V Positive fixed voltage LDO Regulator) TO220 Package to get +5V _ISO at Pin J5 Pin1 w.r.t. ISO5V_GND Pin2 of connector J5. LED D6 indication for +5V_ISO. E) Ventilation Fan Supply: +12V Transformer secondary output voltage 0-9 VAC at connector J11 on Power Supply PCB is being rectified – BR5 & Filtered by C28. Unregulated +12V power supply at connector J12 Pin1 +12V w.r.t. GND Pin2 of J12 is being used for Ventilation fan of Blood Analyzer. LED D7 indication for +12V ventilation fan Supply. Location: Power Supply PCB is located on the L-plate at backside of the machine. Ref.: Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & bottom side – SSB of Power Supply PCB ELS62011R3.
9-22
Service Manual
XL-200
Power Supply PCB ELS62011R3
9.9. LLC Junction Board: ELS62006/R2 This PCB is used to sense the levels of liquid in cans for DI water, Cleaning solution, Bio Hazard waste, Waste provided with the machine. Float sensor is used to sense liquid level & respective sensed level signal is sending to CPU PCB assy through Interface card. Dead volume defined with the help of mounting rod of Float sensor. DI-Water / Cleaning solution: Initially Can is full. Liquid goes below float sensor Level, contact of Float sensor get changed over. Respective signal will be sending to CPU PCB assy through connector J1. CPU PCB assy generate respective ERROR signal to indicate on LLC PCB through connector J1. Connector J2: Float level sensor input DI – water, LED D1: Float level Error. Connector J3: Float level sensor input Cleaning solution, LED D2: Float level Error. Bio Hazard Waste / Waste: Initially can is empty. Liquid goes above float level sensor, contact of Float sensor get changed over. Respective signal will be sending to CPU PCB assy through connector J1. CPU PCB assy generate respective ERROR signal to indicate on LLC PCB through connector J1.
9-23
Service Manual
XL-200
Connector J4: Float level sensor input Bio-Hazard Waste, LED D3: Float level Error. Connector J5: Float level sensor input Cleaning solution , LED D4: Float level Error Buzzer will give Beep for respective Error. Location: LLC PCB assy is located at RHS – Back side of the machine. Refer: Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & bottom side – SSB of LLC Junction PCB ELS62006R2.
9.10. USB Connector ELLC2003R4 USB Connector PCB: Silicon lab make CP2102 – USB to UART Bridge is being used for USB communication between CPU & PC – USB Port. Serial USB signals through PC serial communication to USB connector PCB Assy J4. USB connector PCB assy J3 connected to PC USB port through USB cable.
9-24
Service Manual
XL-200
Location: USB CONNECTOR PCB assy is located at LHS – Back side of the machine. Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & bottom side – SSB of USB CONNECTOR PCB ELLC2003R3
OR Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & bottom side – SSB of USB CONNECTOR PCB ELLC2003R4.
9-25
Service Manual
XL-200
9.11. Front Panel Indicator ELD52003R2 FRONT PANEL INDICATOR PCB ASSY: - Bicolor is being used to differentiate Analyzer Power UP at Mains Power by Rear Panel Power ON/OFF switch: RGT Cooling is ON, ISE is ON (ISE : Optional) visually indicated by RED color LED Array AND at Control “ON”: Analyzer’s all interfaces are Power UP, visually indicated by Green color LED array. Front Panel indicator Bicolor consisted of Relay to switch between Red & Green LED Supply. Bicolor LED (RED & Green) with Lens are used in the form of LED Array visually at Front Side for User to identify the Analyzer is working in RGT Cooling or Under User mode. From 12V / 20A SMPS +12V Supply through relay NC contact is connected to Anode of RED LED hence after Mains Power ON RED LED Array is lit i.e. Analyzer under RGT Cooling mode. From 5V SMPS, +5V supply is connected to Through relay NO contact to Anode of Green LED array hence after Control ON, relay gets activated & NO contact became NC & Green LED array is Lit. Location: Front Panel Indicator PCB Assy – Bicolor is mounted on Front Panel. Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST & SSB – Bottom for reference.
9-26
Service Manual
XL-200
9.12. Sleep Mode PCB Assembly – ELS62033R1 Sleep mode PCB assembly is being used to control mains supply of Lamp assembly SMPS S60 -12, CPU PCB assembly is detecting the hardware present in machine & accordingly as per schedule in system sleep mode is enabling & disabling. During Sleep mode enable Lamp assembly Mains Input of SMPS S60-12 is made OFF, which switched OFF the lamp assembly. During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Lamp assembly SMPS is switched ON with the help of Isolator with Zero crossing detector U1 L MOC3061 & U2 Triac T1235. During Sleep mode enable Pressure Pump – DI water Pump Mains Input is made OFF, which switched OFF the Pressure pump assembly. During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Pressure pump is switched ON with the help of Isolator with Zero crossing detector U3 MOC3061 & U4 Triac T1235. During Sleep mode enable Vacuum Pump Mains Input is made OFF, which switched OFF the Vacuum pump assembly. During Sleep mode disable Mains input of Vacuum pump is switched ON with the help of Isolator with Zero crossing detector U5 MOC3041 & U6 Triac T1235. Location: Sleep mode PCB assembly is mounted at backside of Power supply PCB assembly bracket. Sleep mode settings can be configured using Settings > System Parameters screen in MultiXL software. Refer Operator manual for more details. Refer Silkscreen layout of Top - SST for reference.
9-27
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
9-28
Service Manual
XL-200
10. Electrical Wiring Description This chapter provides the interconnection of various cables running through the machine. Each assembly wiring is covered separately in this chapter. Though the diagrams do not provide the actual type of cable, connector, route used for wiring, the cable assy drawing numbers have been mentioned against most of the wires.
10-1
Service Manual
XL-200
10.1. WDS6001 Mains Input/Power Supply Distribution
10-2
Service Manual
XL-200
10.2. WDS6002 5V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram
10-3
Service Manual
XL-200
10.3. WDS6003 12V/5A SMPS Wiring Diagram without Sleep Mode
10-4
Service Manual
XL-200
10.4. WDS6024 : Wiring Diagram- With Sleep Mode – Mains Input 220V AC
10-5
Service Manual
XL-200
10.5. WDS6024 : Wiring Diagram- With Sleep Mode – Mains Input 110V AC
10-6
Service Manual
XL-200
10.6. WDS6004 24V/1.1A SMPS Wiring Diagram
10-7
Service Manual
XL-200
10.7. WDS6005 12V/20A SMPS Wiring Diagram
10-8
Service Manual
XL-200
10.8. WDS6006 24V/6.3A SMPS Wiring Diagram
10-9
Service Manual
XL-200
10.9. WDS6007 Interface R7 Board Wiring Diagram
10-10
Service Manual
XL-200
10.10. WDS6007 Interface R7.1 Board Wiring Diagram
10-11
Service Manual
XL-200
10.11. WDS6008 Power Supply PCB Wiring Diagram
10-12
Service Manual
XL-200
10.12. WDS6009 RGT Temperature Controller Unit Assembly
10-13
Service Manual
XL-200
10.13. WDS6010 Arm OPTO and LLS Signal Wiring Diagram
10-14
Service Manual
XL-200
10.14. WDS6012 RCT Sensor Wiring Diagram
10-15
Service Manual
XL-200
10.15. WDS6013 Transformer 220V AC Wiring Diagram
10-16
Service Manual
XL-200
10.16. WDS6014 LLC Junction PCB Wiring Diagram
10-17
Service Manual
XL-200
10.17. WDS6018 Transformer 110VAC Wiring Diagram
10-18
Service Manual
XL-200
10.18. WDS6020 Wiring Diagram – CPU PCB to USB PCB
10-19
Service Manual
XL-200
10.19. WDS5057: 4 Channel ISE Module Wiring Assembly
10-20
Service Manual
XL-200
10-21
Service Manual
XL-200
10.20. WDS6021 110V Terminal Block Wiring Diagram
10-22
Service Manual
XL-200
10.21. WDS6022 Arm Assembly Wiring Diagram with LLS PCB ELS62026/R1
10-23
Service Manual
XL-200
10.22. WDS6022 Arm Assembly Wiring Diagram – With LLS PCB ELS22036R2.1
10-24
Service Manual
XL-200
10.23. WDS6024 Wiring Diagram – Sleep Mode PCB ELS62033R1: Mains Input 220V AC
Sleep Mode scheme for 220V mains Input
10-25
Service Manual
XL-200
10.24. WDS6024 Wiring Diagram – Sleep Mode PCB ELS62033R1: Mains Input 110V AC
Sleep Mode scheme for 110V mains Input
10-26
Service Manual
XL-200
10.25. Wiring Diagram Of Canmax Barcode Scanner
10-27
Service Manual
XL-200
10.26. Inter Connection Wiring Diagram of XL-200 Mains Input 220VAC
10-28
Service Manual
XL-200
10.27. Inter Connection Wiring Diagram of XL-200 Mains Input 110VAC
10-29
Service Manual
XL-200
10.28. Electrical Assembly of Sapphire Syringe
10-30
Service Manual
XL-200
10.29. Electrical Assembly of TX2 -110V MAINS WIRING
10-31
Service Manual
XL-200
10.30. Electrical Assembly Of Stepper Motor
10-32
Service Manual
XL-200
10.31. EAS6011 RGT Duct Electrical Assembly
10-33
Service Manual
XL-200
10.32. EAS6016 RCT Slip Ring Electrical Assembly
10-34
Service Manual
XL-200
10.1. EAS6003 Stirrer Motor Electrical Assembly
10-35
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
10-36
Service Manual
XL-200
11. Mechanical Description 11.1. Sample and Reagent Arm Unit Function: When the analyzer is initialized, the Arm positions itself to the trough position (Home position for the Arm Assembly). In case of R1 & Sample aspiration, Arm moves to the reagent bottle position as required. Syringe pipettes the reagent from R1 bottle placed in the Reagent Tray and moves to the trough position, where the probe is rinsed with warm DI water externally. Then the Arm positions the probe to the Sample aspiration position on the ASP tray and aspirates the sample. Then the Arm positions the Probe to the Cuvette, where the aspirated sample followed by aspirated Reagent is dispensed into the Cuvette. Then the Arm positions the Probe to the trough position and the Probe is rinsed with warm DI water internally and externally. Similarly, in the case of R2 reagent, the Arm positions the probe at R2 bottle position and R2 reagent is aspirated. Then the Arm positions the Probe to the respective Cuvette and the R2 reagent is dispensed. Then the Arm positions the Probe to the trough position and the Probe is rinsed with warm DI water internally and externally. In the same fashion, the Syringe pump pipettes the Samples/Standards/Controls placed in the Sample Tray and dispenses in the cuvette or into the ISE receptacle as the case may be. Then the Arm positions to the Trough position and the Probe is cleaned with warm DI water internally and externally, at the trough position. Components of Arm Assembly: Component
Function and Operation
Up/Dn Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts Up/Dn motion to the probe
Rotation Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts Rotation motion to the probe
Probe
Aspirates / Dispenses Sample/Reagent. Respective Syringe facilitates Aspiration/Dispensing
VOD Sensor
Opto Interrupter. Vertical Obstruction Detection Sensor for Probe, to prevent damage to probe
Trough Position Sensor
Opto Interrupter. For Sensing the Home Position, i.e. the Trough, in the Rotational direction
Rotation Position Sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the position of probe in Rotational direction
Up/Dn Position sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the Home position of the pipette (Top Position) in the Vertical Direction.
11-1
Service Manual
XL-200
Sample and Reagent Arm Assembly
11.2. Sample/Reagent Dilutor Assembly Function: The SPP / RPP Dilutor assembly enable the arm assembly to aspirate / dispense respective fluids (i.e. Air / Reagent / Sample / Standard / Control / Warm DI water). Components of SPP/RPP Dilutor Assembly: Component
Function and Operation
Up / Down Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts Up / Dn motion to the Dilutor assembly.
Up Home Position Sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the Home Position of the Dilutor Actuator (Up / Position)
Plunger
Moves up and down upon receiving appropriate command.
DI water Valve
Solenoid operated valve meant for controlling the operational flow of warm DI water to the probe.
11-2
Service Manual Syringe
XL-200 In the normal operation, when the DI water valve is closed, the Sample / Standards / Controls are aspirated / dispensed by the action of the syringe. When the DI water valve is open, the syringe is in the UP position, so that the warm water from the Pressure tank flows through the syringe to the inner side of the probe, to facilitate cleaning of the inner walls of the probe.
11.3. CRU Assembly Function: The Cuvettes are cleaned up through the nine positions of the CRU (One position is NULL meant for taking out the cuvette blank readings). The sequence of the cleaning steps are as follows: Step 1: Aspiration of Biohazard waste and dispensing of Cleaning Solution Step 2: Aspiration of waste and dispensing of DI water Step 3: Aspiration of waste and dispensing of DI water Step 4: Aspiration of waste and dispensing of DI water Step 5: Aspiration of waste and dispensing of DI water Step 6: Aspiration of waste and dispensing of DI water
11-3
Service Manual
XL-200
Step 7: NULL (Cuvette Blank Reading!) Step 8: Aspiration of left over water Step 9: Aspiration of left over water and cleaning up of cuvette. Components of Cuvette Rinsing Assemblies: Component
Function and Operation
Up/ Dn Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts Up / Dn motion to the CRU unit
Up Sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing (Home) Up position of the CRU
Dn Sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the Down position of the CRU
11-4
Service Manual
XL-200
11.4. Stirrer (STR) Assembly Function: The STR assembly is meant for performing the mixing operation of mixing the sample and reagent(s) in the cuvette. When both R1 and R2 are programmed, The Stirrer Assembly will first mix the R2 reagent and then in the next cycle, it would mix the Sample + Reagent 1 mixture. To reduce the possibilities of contamination due to adherence to paddle, the paddles are coated with hydrophobic materials (e.g. Teflon). After performing the mixing operation inside the cuvette, the arm swings itself to the trough position, wherein the warm DI water from the Pressure Tank cleans the wetted surface of the Teflon coated paddle. Components Stirrer Assembly: Component
Function and Operation
Up / Dn Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts Up and Down motion to the Arm carrying the mixing paddle.
Rotation Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts Rotation motion to the Arm carrying the mixing paddle.
Arm
This element carries the mixing motor and the paddle.
Paddle
Stirrer paddle. Teflon Coated.
Up Sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the Home position of the Arm
Trough Position
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the home position in the rotary direction. At home position, the stirrer paddle is over the trough position.
Rotation sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the position of the arm in the rotary direction.
11-5
Service Manual
XL-200
11.5. Sample Transport Assembly (ASP) Function: The Samples Transport (ASP) Assembly consists of Base Assembly and the Tray Assembly. Sample tray consist of 30 positions 1 – 30 for sample & 9 positions I1 – I9 for Standards, Blank, controls & calibrators. This part of the tray can easily be removed and reassembled, ensuring ease of use. The ASP assembly is capable of identifying the barcode labels stuck onto the sample tubes, by means of Sample Barcode Reader.
11-6
Service Manual
XL-200
Components of ASP Assembly: Component
Function and Operation
Rotation Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts rotary motion to the ASP.
Home position Sensor
Opto Interrupter. Senses Home position of the ASP.
Position Sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the rotary position of the ASP Tray.
ASP Container
This container, which is a stationary part, houses the ASP, contains a window to facilitate barcode reading of the samples.
Barcode Reader Mounting Bracket
Meant for mounting the Barcode reader.
Sample Tray Assembly
Assembly of Sample Tray.
11-7
Service Manual
XL-200
11.6. Reagent Transport (RGT) Assembly Function: The Reagents Tray (RGT) Assembly consists of Base Assembly and the Tray Assembly. The tray has 50 positions which are capable of receiving 50ml (Large) & 20ml (small) bottles. The positions of the bottles are alternately numbered with respect to inner bottles and outer bottles. The RGT assembly is capable of identifying the barcode labels stuck onto the reagent bottles, by means of Reagent Barcode Reader. The reagent tray assembly is provided with thermally insulated lid, provided with an interlock by means of a proximity switch. The reagent tray assembly is provided with refrigeration (Peltier) air circulation system meant for cooling the reagents for better stability. Components of RGT Assembly Component
Function and Operation
Reagent Tray
Tray which receives the reagent bottles.
Rotation Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts rotary motion to the reagent tray.
Home position sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the home position of the reagent tray.
Rotation position sensor
Opto Interrupter. Senses the rotational position of the Reagent Tray.
Barcode Reader
(Not shown in the figure) Meant for identifying the reagents by means of barcode labels stuck on to the reagent bottles.
RGT container
The container which houses the Reagent base assembly and the reagent tray.
RGT Cover
Lid that covers RGT assembly to help avoiding evaporation of reagents. This lid is provided with an interlock proximity switch to sense the opening and closing of the RGT cover.
RGT cooling system
Refrigerated air circulation system for cooling the reagents.
11-8
Service Manual
XL-200
11.7. Reaction Cuvette (RCT) Assembly Function: The RCT assembly consists of base assembly, water jacket assembly and the cuvette ring set assembly. The base assembly consists of the rotating shaft and bearing assembly along with the slip ring assembly. The Water jacket assembly is a stationary assembly meant for covering the rotating part of the RCT i.e. the housing and the cuvette ring set assembly. The cuvette ring set assembly
11-9
Service Manual
XL-200
consists of 45 slotted ring, outer ring, cuvette retaining spring and cuvette retaining plastic pieces along with the foil heater mounted at the bottom of the 45 slotted rings. The cuvette ring set assembly also houses the three temperature sensor assemblies meant for monitoring the temperature of the RCT. The terminals of the photometer lamp are mounted onto the water jacket assembly. Components of RCT Assembly: Component
Function and Operation
Rotating Motor
Stepper Motor. Imparts rotary motion to the cuvette ring set assembly
Home position sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the home position of the cuvette ringlet assembly.
Rotation position sensor
Opto Interrupter. For sensing the rotation position of the cuvette ring set assembly.
Cuvettes
Reaction cuvettes, 72 numbers
Slip ring assembly
To supply to the foil heater and to transport the sensing signals of the thermistor.
Temperature sensor assembly
Meant for monitoring the temperature of the cuvette ring set assembly
Foil heater
Meant for heating the RCT table
Water jacket assembly
Meant for covering the cuvette ring set assembly
11-10
Service Manual
XL-200
11.8. Pressure Tank Assembly Function: The main purpose of the pressure tank assembly is to provide warm water at constant pressure to the Probe, CRU Section, to the troughs of the Probe and the Stirrer unit. To achieve this purpose, the pressure tank assembly is provided with a resistance heater, a pressure gauge/sensor, a thermostat and a thermal cutoff switch. To maintain the pressure inside the pressure tank, a pressure regulator is mounted in the hydraulic line. To maintain the temperature of DI water inside the pressure tank, a thermostat is provided. And to monitor the pressure of DI water inside the pressure tank, a pressure sensor is mounted. Components of Pressure Tank Assembly: Component
Function / Operation
Pressure Tank
Stainless Steel fabricated pressure tank to contain hot DI water at pressure
Digital Pressure Indicator
Pressure sensor to monitor the pressure inside the pressure tank
Heater
Resistance heater, meant for heating the DI water inside the pressure tank
Thermostat
To control the power supplied to the heater
Thermal cutoff switch
Safety switch meant for cutting off the power supply in case of overheating (may in the case of thermostat failure!)
11-11
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
11-12
Service Manual
XL-200
12. Hydraulic Description 12.1. Hydraulic Section The hydraulic section is located on the back side of the analyzer. The main components are the DI Water Pump, Digital Pressure Indicator, Damper, Pressure tank, 2 CKD valves, Dual Head Suction Pump, Degasser, Detergent Pump and the Bio-hazardous Pump. There are 3 adjustments points – Pressure Regulator Valve (pressure in pressure tank), Detergent Flow Controller and Pinch Valve (for CRU water flow), and the Legris drain valve is to allow drain of the pressure tank.
Syringe valve
Stirrer CKD valve
Bio-hazard Pump
Overflow CKD valve
Detergent Pump Double Headed Waste Suction Pump
Syringe Assembly
Pressure Tank
DI water Pump Damper
Drain valve Figure 12-1 Hydraulic section viewed from back side
12-1
Service Manual
XL-200
Arm CKD valve
Degasser
Water CKD valve
Pressure Regulator Digital Pressure Indicator
Figure 12-2 Hydraulic section viewed from right side
12.2. Hydraulic System Operation This section explains the hydraulic connection diagram and the cuvette-rinsing unit. The hydraulic system consists of the valves, pumps, tubing, pressure vessel, regulators and the laundry system. Mentioned below are the functions of the various valves and pumps.
12.2.1. Valves and Pump Functions WATER CKD VALVE
Enables / Disables the flow of DI water, from the pressure vessel to the laundry probes.
STIR CKD VALVE
Enables / Disables the flow of DI water, from the pressure vessel to the Stirrer trough.
ARM CKD VALVE
Enables / Disables the flow of DI water, from the pressure vessel to the arm trough valve.
Overflow CKD VALVE
After a water dispense cycle is completed by the laundry dispense probes, the WATER CKD valve is shut. The overflow CKD valve is then enabled for a moment, this action aspirates and empties the remaining water contents from within the laundry dispense probes, thereby preventing water dripping from the dispense probes.
12-2
Service Manual
XL-200
Syringe VALVE
Enables / Disables the flow of DI water, from the pressure vessel to the probe, as required in every cycle.
Pressure Regulator:
To regulate and maintain a steady water pressure in the tank / vessel.
DI Water pump
To pump DI water from the DI water can to the pressure vessel/tank.
Detergent pump
To pump detergent solution into the first laundry probe. The pump comprise of an inbuilt regulator.
Bio hazardous waste pump
To suck the waste out, from the first laundry probe.
Double head waste Suction pump
To suck the waste out, from the 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 laundry probes.
12.3. Hydraulic Connection Diagram This is supplied with the analyzer along with types of tubes & connectors used. Please refer to this drawing, if required.
12.4. Cuvette Rinsing Unit Refer section 11.3 CRU Assembly for more details.
12-3
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
12-4
Service Manual
XL-200
13. Maintenance It is recommended that the analyzer be maintained by the user with proper instructions from the service personal to get the optimum output and to avoid any possible damage to the analyzer. Warning: Voltages present in the XL-200 can produce severe electrical shocks. Place the analyzer and the computer in the OFF (0) position and disconnect all line chords before attempting any maintenance procedure.
Warning: Follow the laboratory’s safety protocol for cleaning and decontaminating the analyzer and surrounding work surface.
Do not perform any maintenance procedure other than those described in this manual.
Electrostatic sensitive components present on the PC boards in the XL-200 require you to ground yourself even when the Analyzer is in the OFF (0) position, otherwise damage to the Analyzer electro-sensitive components and PC boards can occur.
13.1. Maintenance Intervals The Clinical Chemistry Analyzer has been designed to require very little user maintenance compared to the others analyzers of the same class. Regular cleaning and periodic maintenance as per the schedule keeps the analyzer in good working condition without any trouble. For example, clean the cuvettes externally once every few months as per the cleaning procedure. For easy understanding, different tables are included in this section. Table 1 is the maintenance schedule for operator. This table should be used as a reference for performing daily, weekly, quarterly, and annual maintenance. Table 2 is the replacement schedule for different consumables. Regular maintenance of the analyzer will ensure trouble free operation and consistent quality test results throughout its working. Hence, the user should perform daily Cuvette rinsing.
13-1
Service Manual
XL-200
13.1.1. Daily Maintenance Start of the day procedure Serial Number
Description
1
Fill the de-ionized water can.
2
Fill the cleaning solution can.
3
Clean the probes tips and stirrer paddles with tissue paper soaked in alcohol.
4
Perform the sample/reagent probe wash.
5
Replace the printer paper if necessary.
6
Perform Prime, Cuvette Wash and Probe Wash operations & Check Cell Blanks. Wipe the probe with tissue paper externally gently, if necessary
7
Perform the photometer check and verify that the auto span check has passed successfully. (Observe after 30 minutes warm-up).
8
Verify the reagent tray and reaction tray temperature.
9
In case of ISE unit, ensure that there is enough CAL A and CAL B solution.
10
Replenish or replace the reagents if necessary.
End of the day Procedure Serial Number
Description
1
Remove and discard all sample / standard and controls cups or tubes from the sample tray.
2
Carry out Acid and Alkali Wash (Auto Wash) if Latex based chemistries are used during the day
3
Perform the water save.
4
Take a backup of all patient reports.
5
Turn off the main switch located on the right hand side of the analyzer (in case ISE and if reagent cooling required, leave left hand side switch on) analyzer
6
Empty the waste and bio-hazardous waste cans.
7
Clean analyzer external surface, to remove residues of serum, reagents etc.
13.1.2. Weekly Maintenance Serial Number
Description
1
Clean and fill the de-ionized water can.
2
Clean the cleaning solution can.
3
In case of ISI unit, ensure enough CAL A and CAL B solution.
4
Clean the stirrer paddles and laundry probes with alcohol.
5
Check the syringe assembly and surrounding tubes.
6
Clean the computer, trolley, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
7
Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item. (Maintain proper room cleanliness).
8
Clean the sample or reagent probe.
13-2
Service Manual
XL-200
9
Clean the sample tray.
10
Clean the reagent tray.
11
Perform an auto span check and note down the gain values for all the wavelengths.
12
Perform a cuvette rinse and check cuvette blanks
13
Perform a precision check and note down the %CV for an end point and kinetic test.
14
Clean the barcode reader window, in the piece of RGT base unit.
13.1.3. Quarterly Maintenance Serial Number
Description
1
Clean the waste can.
2
Clean the bio hazardous waste can.
3
Clean and fill the de-ionized water can.
4
Clean the cleaning solution can.
5
In case of ISI unit, ensure enough CAL A and CAL B solution.
6
Clean the computer, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
7
Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item (maintain proper room cleanliness).
8
Clean the sample or reagent probe.
9
Clean the stirrer paddles.
10
Clean the laundry probes.
11
Clean the sample tray.
12
Clean the reagent tray.
13
Clean the fans.
15
Clean the bar code reader.
16
Perform the auto span check and note down the gain values for all the wavelengths.
17
Perform a cuvette rinse.
18
Perform a precision check and note down the %CV for an end point and kinetic test.
19
Replace the lamp
20
Clean the internal surface free of dust.
21
Perform an auto span check and note down the gain values for all the wavelengths.
22
Carry out site verification for temperature, line voltage, electrical ground, ventilation, external interferences, room lighting, and laboratory cleanliness practice.
23
Make a detailed entry of the maintenance carried out and site verifications performed in the error log book.
13.1.4. Annual Maintenance Serial Number
Description
1
Clean the waste can.
13-3
Service Manual
XL-200
2
Clean the bio hazardous waste can.
3
Clean and fill the de-ionized water can.
4
Clean the cleaning solution can.
5
In case of ISI unit, ensure enough CAL A and CAL B solution.
6
Replace External Tubing to the Waste, Bio Hazardous Waste, Cleaning Solution And Deionized Water Cans.
7
Clean the analyzer external surface.
8
Clean the computer, monitor, keyboard and printer external surface.
9
Clean the area around the analyzer, and discard any unwanted item (maintain proper room cleanliness).
10
Check and replace the sample or reagent probe if necessary.
11
Check and replace the stirrer paddles.
12
Replace the laundry probes.
13
Clean the sample transport.
14
Clean the reagent transport.
15
Check and replace the syringe dilutor assembly.
16
Clean the fans.
17
Clean the bar code readers.
18
Perform the auto span check and note down the gain values for all the wavelengths.
19
Perform a cuvette rinse.
20
Perform a precision check and note down the %CV for an end point and kinetic test.
21
Replace the lamp.
22
Clean the internal surface free of dust.
23
Perform an auto span check and note down the gain values for all the wavelengths.
24
Carry out site verification for temperature, line voltage, electrical ground, ventilation, external interferences, room lighting, and laboratory cleanliness practice.
25
Make a detailed entry in the error log book, of the maintenance carried out and site verifications.
NOTE: Average life of the Lamp is 1000 hours. Replacement of Lamp depends on its usage and ON Time. Average use life of water filter is 3 months. Replacement of water filter depends on quality of DI water used.
13-4
Service Manual
XL-200
13.2. Replacement Schedule for Spares and Consumable Serial Number
Spares/Consumables
3 Months
6 Months
9 Months
12 Months
1
SAMPLE PROBE
2
STIRRER PADDLE
3
CUVETTE DRYER BLOCK (TEFLON)
4
LAUNDRY DISPENSE TUBING
5
LAUNDRY ASPIRATION TUBING
6
LAUNDRY PROBE ASSY
7
PHOTOMETER LAMP ASSY
13.3. Preventative Maintenance 13.3.1. Actions Taken in the Event of Trouble When any abnormal conditions are found in the analyzer, the operator is requested to check the following items: 1. Preparation and preservation methods of reagents. 2. Preparation and preservation methods of sample. 3. Operational procedures of the analyzer and maintenance work. NOTE: When such an abnormal condition is considered to be caused by an electrical or mechanical failure, do not try to carry out the inspection of the analyzer by your own and call for service at our customer service department.
13.3.1.1. Information Requested by Our Customer Service Department When any technical service will be called for at our customer service department, the following information is requested to be prepared. Trouble in assembly.
Serial number of analyzer in use. Method code in question. Explanation of encountered trouble. Serial number and lot number of reagent, calibrator and QC sample in use.
13-5
Service Manual
XL-200
A few calibration results that were carried out recently. A few measurement results of QC sample, that were carried out recently.
Measurement results. Trouble in analyzer.
Serial number of analyzer in use. Software version numbers in use (PC, Mechanical and Sub-CPU). Explanation of the relevant alarm and problem, and any other information about the analyzer in use and maintenance.
13.3.1.2. Malfunction at the Time of Power ON If the analyzer cannot be activated, follow the procedures shown below: 1. Check that the main switch located on the right hand side of the analyzer is at "ON" position. 2. Check that the main fuses are not burnt. 3. When the main fuses are checked, turn the main switch off without fail and then pull out the plug of power supply cable from its receptacle on the analyzer. Open up the fuse cover and pull the fuses out. 4. Check that the circuit breaker of the power supply system to which the analyzer is connected is not cut off. Fuse cover
13.3.1.3. Anomalous Measurement Results There may be two cases that the analytical errors are noticed, i.e., by error flag or unexpected results. In the following cases, troubleshooting is requested. 1. Error flag is set to the calibration results. 2. Error flag is set to the measurement results of QC sample or normal sample. 3. The measurement results of QC sample are out of range of judgment criteria. Investigate which situation shown below is applicable to the error in
13-6
Service Manual
XL-200
the measurement results of calibration, QC sample or normal sample. Based on the investigation, further check may be requested. 4. The resultant values obtained from measurements of a specific method are high for all samples. 5. The resultant values obtained from measurements of a specific method are low for all samples. 6. Erroneous results are randomly derived from the measurement. 7. Two or more anomalous measurement results are observed: a. From all methods, or b. Randomly.
13.3.1.4. Check for Preparation of Reagent, Calibrator or QC Sample Perform the following checks in order to track down the cause for high, low or random resultant measurement results. When a reagent, calibrator or QC sample is prepared, read the respective statement of virtues carefully and follow its instruction. 1. Preparation of reagent. a. Was there any change of the reagent? b. Is the term of validity of the prepared reagent still valid? c. Was the reagent prepared according to the correct procedures? d. Was the reagent prepared using fresh, non-bacteria contaminated and de- ionized water or appropriate diluent? 2. Preparation of QC sample. a. Was the volume used for preparation correct? b. Does the sample have been preserved as recommended? c. Is the term of validity of the sample still valid? d. Was the sample prepared using a pipette calibrated in terms of volume? e. Is the term of validity of the sample lot still valid? f. Was the sample prepared using appropriate diluent? 3. Preparation of calibrator. a. Was there any change of the lot number? b. Was the calibrator prepared using volume correctly? c. Does the calibrator have been preserved as recommended?
13-7
Service Manual
XL-200
d. Is the term of validity of the calibrator still valid? e. Was the calibrator prepared using a pipette calibrated in terms of volume? f. Was the calibrator prepared using appropriate diluent? The further checks are requested to track down the cause referring to the following lists after the above checks have been completed.
13.3.1.5. High Resultant Values from a Specific Method for all Samples Serial Number
Cause
Corrective action
1
Incorrect calibration results.
Check the preparation of the calibrator.
Check that the calibration settings are correct.
The calibration is performed again if necessary.
Check the temperature shown in the Service Check > Temperature > Read.
Call for service at our customer service department when the indicated temperature deviates from the specified value of 37 ± 0.2ºC.
2
Too high inside temperature of RCT unit.
3
Improper preparation of reagent.
Check the preparation of the reagent.
4
Improper preparation of calibrator.
Check the preparation of the calibrator.
13.3.1.6. Low Resultant Values from a Specific Method for all Samples Serial Number
Cause
Corrective action
1
Expiration of the term of validity of reagent.
See the statement of virtues that comes together with the reagent kit for its stability.
2
Improper preparation of reagent.
Check the preparation of the reagent.
3
Improper preservation of reagent.
See the statement of virtues that comes together with the reagent kit for its proper preservation method.
4
Too low inside temperature of RCT unit.
Check the temperature shown in the Service Check > Temperature > Read.
Call for service at our customer service department
13-8
Service Manual
XL-200 when the indicated temperature deviates from the specified value of 37 ± 0.2 ºC.
5
Improper preparation of calibrator.
Check the preparation of the calibrator.
6
Excessive volume of reagent dispensed.
Check if there is any leakage or drip at junction of reagent sampling system.
13.3.1.7. Randomly Derived Erroneous Measurement Results Serial Number
Cause
Corrective action
1
Fibrin clots formed on specific sample tube or sample cup.
Clean the SPT probe.
2
Insufficient water or solution supply from respective external tank.
Check if the tip of water or solution tube is positioned below the water or solution level. Call for service at our customer service department in case of trouble.
3
Insufficient stirring.
Check if the stirrer rotates in the center of cuvette and at the correct speed.
13.3.1.8. Anomalous Resultant Values from all Methods for a Sample Serial Number
Cause
Corrective action
1
Improper preparation of reagent.
Prepare newly the reagent referring to the statement of virtues that comes together with the reagent kit.
2
Expiration of term of validity, contamination or paleness of reagent.
Prepare newly the reagent referring to the statement of virtues that comes together with the reagent kit.
13.3.2. Equipment Malfunction It may be difficult for the user to deal with the problem, the troubleshooting of which is beyond this limited extent. In such a case, call for service at our customer service department.
13.3.2.1. Detection of Mechanical Problem All the mechanical movements are controlled and monitored by the computer. When a problem arises, the computer becomes aware of it and generates the visual error message to call the operator's attention. In the event of the problem that may affect the performance of the analyzer, the sampling stop or emergency stop will be executed. In the case of sampling stop mode, the analyzer carries on and completes the processing of the sample that is
13-9
Service Manual
XL-200
not affected by the problem. In the case of problem that may affect the entire measurements of sample, the emergency stop will be executed. The Report > Error Log screen can be used to view all the errors occurred on the analyzer during the test run or service check. This data is generally useful for servicing/diagnostic purposes. The period of Error List can be selected using From and To Date Calendar. NOTE: When user clicks on Start Run button on Status Monitor, if any error is detected during initialization of the instrument then the error message will be displayed in the error grid on the Screen. In such case, the instruments will stop. The user has to take the corrective action. Problem may arise, which is not monitored by the computer. Any alarm message may not be indicated on the display for such a problem. Such a problem includes abrasion of parts, leakage in the sampling system, etc. When this type of problem occurs, decide whether the processing of sample is carried on or the measurement is terminated, considering that such problem may result in damage to the analyzer or erroneous outcome of measurements.
13.3.2.2. Error messages for each unit Assembly
Error code
Flags
Error Description
Possible Failures Corrective Action to be Taken
Arm
11
@R1
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position error - Trough to Opto signal Reagent 1 position
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation.
2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands. 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection Arm
12
@R1
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position error - Reagent 1 Opto signal position to Trough
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer.
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation.
2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands.
13-10
Service Manual
XL-200 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer.
4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer. Arm
13
Arm VOD error
1. VOD Opto Sensor
(During service check)
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto. 3. Sample arm position in Trough during Reagent 1 operation
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
14
@R1
Arm Up error Trough during reagent 1 operation
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
15
@R1
Arm Down error 1. Arm VOD opto & 1. Switch OFF and then switch - Reagent 1 arm optos ON the instrument. Check if position the error comes again 2. Interface card and its connector
13-11
2. Remove the cover of the sample arm and check and clean obstacle opto
Service Manual
XL-200 3. Probe goes 3. Check the Arm assembly down but doesn’t find LLS signal due to problem in LLS card or its connector 4. Probe assembly 4. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer
Arm
16
@R1
Arm Up error Reagent 1 position
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
Arm
17
18
Arm rotation error
1. Arm position Opto signal
(During service check)
2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute Execute commands
Arm up/down error (During service check)
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation
3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm movement
13-12
Service Manual
XL-200 2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
19
@R1
Arm Down error 1. Arm VOD opto & 1. Switch OFF and then switch - Trough during arm optos ON the instrument. Check if reagent 1 the error comes again operation 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Remove the cover of the sample arm and check and clean obstacle opto
3. Probe goes 3. Check the Arm assembly down but doesn’t find LLS signal due to problem in LLS card or its connector 4. Probe assembly 4. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer Arm
1A
!R1
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Reagent Pos. Sensor
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto 3. Arm position in 3. Go to Service Check: Arm Reagent tray at R1 Menu. Click on position button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer Arm
1A
!D
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Diluent Pos. Sensor
13-13
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
Service Manual
XL-200 2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto 3. Arm position in Reagent tray at Diluent position
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
1B
R1**
R1 LLD Sensing Liquid Level Failure at Pos. Detector
Call the Service Engineer
Arm
1C
!R1!
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Trough during Sensor Reagent 1 operation
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto 3. Sample arm position in Trough during Reagent 1 operation
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
1C
!D!
Arm VOD error – 1. VOD Opto Dilution pos. Sensor
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto 3. Sample arm position in Trough during Reagent 1 operation
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
13-14
Service Manual Arm
1D
XL-200 R1*
Reagent 1 absent - Pos.
1. Reagent is not 1. Place the reagent at the kept in the reagent required reagent position bottle or reagent bottle not kept at the defined position 2. Reagent is below the Dead volume
2. Check the level of Reagent and ensure that it is above the Dead volume
3. Arm position in reagent tray
3. Call Service Engineer
4. LLS circuit and its connector problem Arm
1D
D*
Diluent absent - 1. Reagent is not 1. Place the reagent at the Pos. kept in the reagent required reagent position bottle or reagent bottle not kept at the defined position 2. Reagent is below the Dead volume
2. Check the level of Reagent and ensure that it is above the Dead volume
3. Arm position in reagent tray
3. Call Service Engineer
4. LLS circuit and its connector problem Arm
1E
@R1
Arm Initialize 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotational error Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give command
Arm
1F
@R1
Arm Initialize Up/Down error
3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
3. If the initialization fails, call Service Engineer
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands
13-15
Service Manual
XL-200 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
BB
!S
Arm VOD error at ISE unit
1. Arm VOD opto, 1. Switch OFF and then switch arm position optos, ON the instrument. Check if up/down optos and the error comes again rotation optos 2. Probe assembly 2. Remove the cover of the sample arm and check and clean obstacle opto 3. Interface card and its connector
3. Check the Arm assembly
4. Probe assembly 4. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer Arm
21
@R2
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position error - Trough to Opto signal Reagent 2 position
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation
2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection Arm
22
@R2
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position error - Reagent 2 Opto signal position to R2 Cuvette
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation
2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
13-16
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
Service Manual Arm
23
XL-200 @R2
Arm Rotational error - R2 Cuvette to Trough
1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute commands
Arm
24
@R2
Arm Up error Trough during Reagent 2 operation
3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
25
@R2
Arm Down error 1. Arm VOD opto & 1. Switch OFF and then switch - Reagent 2 arm optos ON the instrument. Check if position the error comes again 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Remove the cover of the sample arm and check and clean obstacle opto
3. Probe goes 3. Check the Arm assembly down but doesn’t find LLS signal due to problem in LLS card or its connector 4. Probe assembly 4. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer
13-17
Service Manual Arm
26
XL-200 @R2
Arm Up error Reagent 2 position
1.ARM up/down opto, ARM position opto ,ARM Home opto ,ARM direction opto
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Arm assembly opto connector(FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
27
@R2
Arm Down error 1. Arm VOD opto & 1. Switch OFF and then switch - Cuvette during arm optos ON the instrument. Check if Reagent 2 the error comes again operation 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Remove the cover of the sample arm and check and clean obstacle opto
3. Probe goes 3. Check the Arm assembly down but doesn’t find LLS signal due to problem in LLS card or its connector 4. Probe assembly 4. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer Arm
28
@R2
Arm Up error R2 Cuvette
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
13-18
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
Service Manual
XL-200 4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections
Arm
29
@R2
Arm Down error 1. Arm VOD opto & 1. Switch OFF and then switch - Trough during arm optos ON the instrument. Check if Reagent 2 the error comes again operation 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Remove the cover of the sample arm and check and clean obstacle opto
3. Probe goes 3. Check the Arm assembly down but doesn’t find LLS signal due to problem in LLS card or its connector 4. Probe assembly 4. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer Arm
2A
!R2
Arm VOD error – 1. VOD Opto Reagent Pos. Sensor
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto 3. Sample arm 3. Go to Service Check: Arm position in Reagent Menu. Click on tray at R2 position button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer Arm
2B
R2!
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Cuvette during Sensor Reagent 2 operation
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto 3. Sample arm position in Cuvette during Reagent 2 operation
13-19
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes.
Service Manual
XL-200 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
2C
!R2!
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Trough during Sensor Reagent 2 operation
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto 3. Sample arm position in Trough during Reagent 2 operation
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
2D
R2*
Reagent absent 1. Reagent is not 1. Place the reagent at the – Pos. kept in the reagent required reagent position bottle or reagent bottle not kept at the defined position 2. Reagent is below the Dead volume
2. Check the level of Reagent and ensure that it is above the Dead volume
3. Arm position in reagent tray
3. Call Service Engineer
4. LLS circuit and its connector problem Arm
2E
R2**
Arm
1F/2F/3F@R2
R2 LLD Sensing Liquid Level Failure at Pos. Detector
Call the Service Engineer
Arm Initialize Up/Down error
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
13-20
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
Service Manual
XL-200 4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections
Arm
31
@S
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; error - Trough to Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make Sample sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
3A6/3A7 !DILN
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Error - Trough to Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make Dilution Cuvette sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
32
@S
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; error - Sample to Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make Cuvette sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
13-21
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
Service Manual Arm
XL-200
320/321/ @S 322
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Error - Sample to Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make Cuvette sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
323/324/ @S 325
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Error - Sample to Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make ISE sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
326
@S
Arm Rotational Error - Dilution Cuvette to Cuvette
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
327
@S
Arm Rotational Error - Dilution Cuvette to ISE
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation
13-22
Service Manual
XL-200 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
328
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position error - Reagent 1 Opto signal position to Cuvette
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate arm by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation
2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection Arm
33
@S
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; error - Cuvette to Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make Trough sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
330/331/ @S 332
Arm Rotational Error - Cuvette to Trough
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Opto or Home opto Rotate arm by hand and make signal sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation
13-23
Service Manual
XL-200 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
333/334/ @S 335
Arm Rotational Error - ISE to Trough
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Opto or Home opto Rotate arm by hand and make signal sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
336
@S
Arm Rotational Error - Cuvette to Trough
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Opto or Home opto Rotate arm by hand and make signal sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
337
@S
Arm Rotational Error - ISE to Trough
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Opto or Home opto Rotate arm by hand and make signal sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation
13-24
Service Manual
XL-200 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
338
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
Arm Rotational 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; error - Cuvette to Opto or Home opto Rotate arm by hand and make Trough signal sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute Execute commands
Arm
34
@S
Arm Up error Trough during sample operation
3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing Arm movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
356/357 @S
Arm Down Error 1. Sample position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; - Dilution Opto signal Rotate arm by hand and make Cuvette sure that nothing is obstructing Arm rotation
13-25
Service Manual
XL-200 2. Interface board 2. Then switch ON the and its connectors instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Up/Down and rotation stepper motor and its connection
Arm
35
@S
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
Arm Down error 1. Arm VOD opto & 1. Switch OFF and then switch - Sample arm optos ON position 2. Interface card and its connector
the instrument. Check if the error comes again
3. Probe goes 2. Remove the cover of the down but doesn’t sample arm and check and find LLS signal due clean obstacle opto to problem in LLS card or its connector 4. Probe assembly 3. Check the Arm assembly
4. Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute commands 5. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer Arm
36
@S
Arm Up error - 1. Arm VOD opto, Sample position arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
13-26
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
Service Manual
XL-200 4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections
Arm
366/367 @S
Arm Up Error - 1.ARM up/down Dilution Cuvette opto, ARM position opto ,ARM Home opto ,ARM direction opto
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Arm assembly opto connector(FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
37
@S
Arm Down error 1. Arm VOD opto & 1. Switch OFF and then switch - Sample arm optos ON the instrument. Check if Cuvette the error comes again 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Remove the cover of the sample arm and check and clean obstacle opto
3. Probe goes 3. Check the Arm assembly down but doesn’t find LLS signal due to problem in LLS card or its connector 4. Probe assembly 4. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer Arm
370/371/ @S 372
Arm Down Error 1.ARM up/down - Cuvette opto, ARM position opto, ARM Home opto, ARM direction opto 2. Arm assembly opto connector(FRC)
13-27
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
Service Manual
XL-200 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
373/374/ @S 375
Arm Down Error 1.ARM up/down - ISE opto, ARM position opto, ARM Home opto, ARM direction opto
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Arm assembly opto connector(FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
376
@S
Arm Down Error 1.ARM up/down - Cuvette opto, ARM position opto ,ARM Home opto ,ARM direction opto
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Arm assembly opto connector(FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
377
@S
Arm Down Error 1. ARM up/down - ISE opto, ARM position opto, ARM Home opto, ARM direction opto
13-28
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
Service Manual
XL-200 2. Arm assembly opto connector(FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
378
Arm Down Error 1.ARM up/down - Cuvette opto, ARM position opto, ARM Home opto, ARM direction opto
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Arm assembly opto connector (FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
38
@S
Arm Up error - 1. Arm VOD opto, Sample Cuvette arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute
Execute Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector
13-29
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
Service Manual
XL-200 4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections
Arm
380/381/ @S 382/ 386/388
Arm Up Error Cuvette
1.ARM up/down opto, ARM position opto ,ARM Home opto ,ARM direction opto
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Arm assembly opto connector(FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
383/384/ @S 385 /387
Arm Up Error ISE
1.ARM up/down opto, ARM position opto, ARM Home opto, ARM direction opto
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Arm assembly opto connector (FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
39
@S
Arm Down error 1. Arm VOD opto & 1. Switch OFF and then switch - Trough during arm optos ON the instrument. Check if sample the error comes again operation 2. Interface card and its connector
13-30
2. Remove the cover of the sample arm and check and clean obstacle opto
Service Manual
XL-200 3. Probe goes 3. Check the Arm assembly down but doesn’t find LLS signal due to problem in LLS card or its connector 4. Probe assembly 4. If still it is giving error, call Service Engineer
Arm
398
Arm Down error 1.ARM up/down - Trough during opto, ARM position Cuvette wash opto, ARM Home opto, ARM direction opto
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Arm assembly opto connector(FRC)
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections Arm
3A
!S
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Sample Pos. Sensor
1. Check whether the selected option is tube and instead of tube a cup is placed
2. The connectors 2. Check the Arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility. 3. Sample arm 3. Remove the cover of the position in Sample sample arm and check and tray clean VOD opto 4. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the Probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 5. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
13-31
Service Manual Arm
3A6/ 3A7
XL-200 !DILN
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Dilution Cuvette. Sensor
1. Check the Arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD opto 3. Sample arm 3. Go to Service Check: Arm position in Dilution Menu. Click on cuvette button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer Arm
3B
S!
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto During Sample Sensor dispense
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD Opto 3. Sample arm position in Dispense cuvette
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
3B
DILN!
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto During Diluted Sensor Sample dispense
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD Opto 3. Sample arm position in Dispense cuvette during dilution
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
13-32
Service Manual Arm
3B0/ 3B1/ 3B2/
XL-200 !S
Arm VOD Error - 1. VOD Opto Cuvette Sensor
1. Check whether the selected option is tube and instead of tube a cup is placed
2. The connectors 2. Check the Arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility. 3. Sample arm 3. Remove the cover of the position in Sample sample arm and check and tray clean VOD opto 4. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the Probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 5. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer Arm
3B3/ 3B4/ 3B5/ 3B7
S!
Arm VOD Error - 1. VOD Opto ISE Sensor
1. Check whether the selected option is tube and instead of tube a cup is placed
2. The connectors 2. Check the Arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility. 3. Sample arm 3. Remove the cover of the position in Sample sample arm and check and tray clean VOD opto 4. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the Probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 5. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer Arm
3B6
!DILN
Arm VOD Error - 1. VOD Opto Cuvette Sensor
1. Check whether the selected option is tube and instead of tube a cup is placed
2. The connectors 2. Check the Arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility. 3. Sample arm 3. Remove the cover of the position in cuvette sample arm and check and during dilution clean VOD opto
13-33
Service Manual
XL-200 4. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the Probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 5. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
3B8
Arm VOD Error - 1. VOD Opto Cuvette during Sensor Cuvette wash
1. Check whether the selected option is tube and instead of tube a cup is placed
2. The connectors 2. Check the Arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility. 3. Sample arm 3. Remove the cover of the position in cuvette sample arm and check and during cuvette clean VOD opto wash 4. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the Probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 5. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer Arm
3C
!S!
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Trough during Sensor Sample operation
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD Opto 3. Sample arm position in Trough during sample operation
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
3C
!DILN!
Arm VOD error - 1. VOD Opto Trough during Sensor Sample Dilution operation
13-34
1. Check the arm alignment in [Service Check]. If it is hitting at the edge, then align the probe using the calibrate facility.
Service Manual
XL-200 2. The connectors 2. Remove the cover of the arm and check and clean VOD Opto 3. Sample arm position in Trough during sample operation
3. Go to Service Check: Arm Menu. Click on button. Push the probe gently to cut the VOD opto so that VOD Error will be generated and Arm initializes. 4. If the initialization or VOD generation fails, call the Service Engineer
Arm
3D
S*
Sample absent - 1. Sample is not 1. Place the sample at the Pos. kept in the sample required sample position tube / cup at that particular position 2. Sample tube / 2. Check the level of Sample cup absent at that and ensure that it is above the particular position Dead volume 3. LLS circuit and its connector problem
3. Call Service Engineer
4. Sample is below the Dead volume 5. Arm position in sample tray Arm
3E
S**
Sample LLD Liquid Level Sensing Failure Detector at Pos.
Call Service Engineer
1. The test of the Patient Sample will be added to Pending list. Arm
3F
@S
Arm Initialize Up/Down error
1. Arm VOD opto, arm position optos, up/down optos and rotation optos
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move SPT arm up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing SPT movement
2. Probe assembly 2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Arm] menu; Give and Execute Execute commands 3. Interface card and its connector 4. Up/down and rotation stepper motor and its connections
13-35
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, call Service Engineer
Service Manual Syringe
XL-200
41
R1 Syringe Initialize error
1. Syringe position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; opto Move the Syringe up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the movement 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Syringe]; Give and
commands
3. Syringe up/down 3. If the initialization or motor aspirate/dispense movement fails, call Service Engineer Syringe
42
@R1
R1 Syringe Up/Down error
1. Syringe position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; opto Move the Syringe up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the movement 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Syringe]; Give and
commands
3. Syringe up/down 3. If the initialization or motor aspirate/dispense movement fails, call Service Engineer Syringe
52
@R2
R2 Syringe Up/Down error
1. Syringe position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; opto Move the Syringe up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the movement 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Syringe]; Give and
commands
3. Syringe up/down 3. If the initialization or motor aspirate/dispense movement fails, call Service Engineer Syringe
61
@SYR
Syringe Initialize 1. Syringe position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; error opto Move the Syringe up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the movement
13-36
Service Manual
XL-200 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Syringe]; Give and
commands
3. Syringe up/down 3. If the initialization or motor aspirate/dispense movement fails, call Service Engineer Syringe
62
Sample Syringe 1. Syringe position 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Up/Down error opto Move the Syringe up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the movement 2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Syringe]; Give and
commands
3. Syringe up/down 3. If the initialization or motor aspirate/dispense movement fails, call Service Engineer Reagent Tray 71
RGT1
Reagent tray 1. Position opto Initialize assembly of RGT Rotational error tray
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate RGT by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Stepper motor 2. Then, switch ON the and its connections instrument; Go to [Service Check: Reagent Tray]; Give command. 3. Interface card and its connector Reagent Tray 72
RGT1
Reagent tray 1. Position opto Rotational error assembly of RGT during run tray
3. If initialization fails, call Service Engineer 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate RGT by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Stepper motor 2. Then, switch ON the and its connections instrument; Go to [Service Check: Reagent Tray]; Give command. 3. Interface card and its connector Reagent Tray 7F
RGT3
RGT Interlock error
3. If initialization fails, call Service Engineer
ARM assembly UP 1. Make sure that arm opto & Direction assembly is not down in RGT opto. tray during service check for reagent i.e. service command 1) RGT initialize 2) RGT tray rotate to “X” position. If arm assembly is not down then checkup opto & direction opto signal.
13-37
Service Manual
XL-200 2. Check opto connectors are connected properly or not.
Reagent Tray V1
“Bottle over-filled at Pos. N“, where N = Position No.
1. Scanned Decrease the Reagent volume Reagent volume is at the required position more than 47ml for Large bottle 2. Scanned Decrease the Reagent volume Reagent volume is at the required position more than 23 ml for Small bottle
Sample Tray 81
Sample tray 1. Position opto Initialize assembly of ASP Rotational error
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate ASP by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Stepper motor 2. Then, switch ON the and its connections instrument; Go to [Service Check: Sample Tray]; Give command. 3. Interface card and its connector Sample Tray 82
ASP2
Sample tray 1. Position opto Rotational error assembly of ASP during run
3. If initialization fails, call Service Engineer 1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate ASP by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Stepper motor 2. Then, switch ON the and its connections instrument; Go to [Service Check: Sample Tray]; Give command. 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If initialization fails, call Service Engineer
ARM assembly UP opto & Direction opto & ARM home opto
1. Make sure that arm assembly is not down in ASP tray during service check for ASP tray i.e. service command 1) ASP initialize 2) ASP tray rotate to “X” position 2. Check opto connectors are connected properly or not.
Sample Tray 8F
ASP3
ASP Interlock Error
RCT Tray
RCT1
RCT tray 1. Position opto Initialize assembly of RCT Rotational error tray
91
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate RCT by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Stepper motor 2. Then switch ON the and its connections instrument; Go to [Service Check: RCT Tray]; Give command 3. Interface card and its connector 4. Arms are down in RCT
13-38
3. If initialization fails, otherwise call Service Engineer
Service Manual RCT Tray
92
XL-200 RCT2
RCT tray 1. Position opto Rotational error assembly of RCT during run tray
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate RCT by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Stepper motor 2. Then switch ON the and its connections instrument; Go to [Service Check: RCT Tray]; Give command 3. Interface card and its connector
3. If initialization fails, otherwise call Service Engineer
4. Arms are down in RCT System Error 98
SYS!
SYS error
1. Error in communication between PC and Analyzer during schedule transmission.
1. Test will be added in pending list. Reschedule the test and perform.
2. In case frequent occurrence of error, contact Service Engineer. Hardware Error
99
HErr
Hardware Error
Check the assembly which gave error prior to Hardware Error.
Take the corrective action for the error which occurred prior to Hardware Error
RCT Tray
9F
RCT3
RCT Interlock error
ARM assembly UP opto & Direction opto & ARM home opto
1. Make sure that arm assembly is not down in RCT tray during service check for RCT tray i.e. service command 1) RCT initialize 2) RCT tray rotate to “X” position 2. Check opto connectors are connected properly or not.
CRU
A1
@CRU
CRU Initialization error
1. CRU Position opto signal
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move CRU up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the CRU movement
2. RCT Position opto signals
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: CRU Unit]; Give and commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, otherwise call Service
13-39
Service Manual
XL-200 Engineer
4. Stepper motor and its connections 5. RCT alignment CRU
A2
@CRU
CRU Up/Down error
1. CRU Position opto signal
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Move CRU up and down by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the CRU movement
2. RCT Position opto signals
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: CRU Unit]; Give and commands
3. Interface card and its connector
3. If the initialization or up/down movement fails, otherwise call Service Engineer
4. Stepper motor and its connections 5. RCT alignment CRU
A3
@CRU
CRU Down Opto Fail
CRU down opto
1. Make sure the down opto is working i.e. CRU down opto LED is ON when OPTO is open and CRU down opto LED is OFF when CRU opto is cut by interrupter. Also ensure that the logic low signal is reaching to CPU board when opto is open i.e. LED is ON & logic high (3.3V) signal reaches the CPU board when opto is cut i.e. LED is OFF. 2. Check opto connectors are connected properly or not.
13-40
Service Manual CRU
A4
XL-200 @CRU
CRU Up Opto Fail
CRU up opto
1. Make sure the up opto is working i.e. CRU up opto led is ON when OPTO is open and CRU up opto led is OFF when CRU opto is cut by interrupter. Also ensure that the logic low signal is reaching to CPU board when opto is open i.e. LED is ON & logic high (3.3V) signal reaches the CPU board when opto is cut i.e. LED is OFF. 2. Check opto connectors are connected properly or not.
CRU
AF
@CRU
CRU Interlock Error
RCT_POSITION _OPTO and CRU_UP_OPTO and CRU_DOWN_O PTO
1. Make sure RCT_position opto is ON and CRU_UP_OPTO is OFF and CRU_DOWN_OPTO is ON before CRU goes down in RCT when down command is executed during service check. 2) Ensure RCT position opto is ON when cru goes down in RCT during run. 2. Check opto connectors are connected properly or not.
Stirrer
Stirrer
B1
B2
@STR 1
@STR 1
Stirrer Up/Down error for Reagent 1
Stirrer Rotational error for Reagent 1
1. Position opto assembly of stirrer
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate stirrer by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Stirrer]; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Stepper motor
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Position opto assembly of stirrer
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate stirrer by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
13-41
Service Manual
Stirrer
BF
XL-200
@STR 3
Stirrer Interlock Error
2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Stirrer]; Give and Execute Execute commands
3. Stepper motor
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
RCT_POSITION _OPTO and STR_HOME_OP TO and STR_DIRECTIO N_OPTO'
Make sure RCT_POSITION_OPTO is ON when stirrer down in cuvette command is executed during service check 2. Check opto connectors are connected properly or not.
Stirrer
Stirrer
C1
C2
@STR 2
@STR 2
Stirrer Up/Down error for Reagent 2
Stirrer Rotational error for Reagent 2
1. Position opto assembly of stirrer
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate stirrer by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Stirrer]; Give and Execute Execute Execute Execute commands
3. Stepper motor
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
1. Position opto assembly of stirrer
1. Switch OFF the analyzer; Rotate stirrer by hand and make sure that nothing is obstructing the rotation
2. Interface card and its connector
2. Then switch ON the instrument; Go to [Service Check: Stirrer]; Give and Execute Execute commands
3. Stepper motor
3. If the initialization or rotation fails, call Service Engineer
13-42
Service Manual
XL-200
Controller
D1
SRAM Memory Error
1. Interface Board (CPU).
1. Switch OFF the Analyzer and Switch it on after few minutes.
Pressure
G1
Low Pressure Level
1. Malfunctioning of pressure unit
Check the pressure unit for any leakage or blockage in the tubing
2. Leakage/Blockag e in pressure tubing Pressure
G2
High Pressure Level
1. Malfunctioning of pressure unit
Check the pressure unit for any leakage or blockage in the tubing
2. Leakage / Blockage in pressure tubing Reagent Tray
H1
RGT!
RGT Cover Open
1. Reagent tray cover placement
1. Check the placement of Reagent Cover
2. The logic levels at the baseboard connectors
2. Check the logic levels at the baseboard connectors/connector connections and verify for proper functionality.
3. Connector connections Cleaning Can
Waste Can
Bio-Waste Can
Pressure
I1
J1
K1
L1
Low Cleaning Solution Level
Empty Waste Reservoir/Was te Tank full to Capacity
Bio-Waste Tank Full to Capacity
Low DI Water Level
1. Cleaning solution Level
1. Check the Cleaning solution Level
2. Sensor output of Level Sensors
2. Check the Sensor Output of Level Sensor
1. Waste Level
1. Check the Waste Level
2. Sensor output of Level Sensors
2. Check the Sensor Output of Level Sensor
1. Bio-Waste Level
1. Check the Bio-Waste Level
2. Sensor output of Level Sensors
2. Check the Sensor Output of Level Sensor
1. Malfunctioning of pressure unit
Check the pressure unit for any leakage or blockage in the tubing
2. Leakage/Blockag e in pressure tubing DI Water Can
M1
DI Water Tank Level less
1. DI Water Level
13-43
1. Check the DI Water Level
Service Manual
XL-200 than or equal to 50%
Photomete r
Photomete r
Barcode Scanner
N1
PDC Operational ERROR
N2
PDC Communicatio n ERROR
P1
Reagent Barcode Scanner Failure
2. Sensor output of Level Sensors
2. Check the Sensor Output of Level Sensor
1. PDC Card.
1. Go to Service Check and give Emergency Stop Command.
2. Interface Board and its connector.
2. Switch OFF the Analyzer and Switch it on after few minutes.
1. PDC Card.
1. Go to Service Check and give Emergency Stop Command.
2. Interface Board and its connector.
2. Switch OFF the Analyzer and Switch it on after few minutes.
1. Reagent Barcode Scanner
1. Check the Reagent barcode scanner
2. Reagent barcode scanner connections
2. Check the Reagent barcode scanner connections
3. Interface board and its connections Barcode Scanner
Q1
Sample Barcode Scanner Failure
1. Sample Barcode Scanner
1. Check the Sample barcode scanner
2. Sample barcode scanner connections
2. Check the Sample barcode scanner connections
3. Interface board and its connections Reagent Tray
R1
RGT!!
RGT Cover open for 5 minutes under standby
1. Reagent tray cover placement
1. Check the placement of Reagent Cover
2. The logic levels at the baseboard connectors
2. Check the logic levels at the baseboard connectors/connector connections and verify for proper functionality.
3. Connector connections
13-44
Service Manual Reaction Tray
T9
XL-200 @TMP
RCT Temperature out of range
1. RCT heater and its connections
1. Go to [Service Check: RCT Temp]; Give command. RCT temperature should be displayed along with the RCT sensor status
2. Interface board and its connections
3. If the temperature is not coming within range, call Service Engineer
3. RCT sensors and its connections Reaction Tray
DC
DC*
Reaction of an on-board diluted sample is performed in Dirty Cuvette
1. Cuvettes dirty
Retest the result.
13.3.2.3. Error Log 1. This sub menu displays the list of errors that occurred in the machine. This data is generally useful for service/diagnostic purposes. One can enter this screen by clicking on Reports > Error Log button. The following screen is displayed:
Figure 13-1. Error log screen
13-45
Service Manual
XL-200
1. The user can select the date range by changing the From and To Date. 2. The user can select operation (Service, Maintenance, Run or All operations) during which the errors occurred. 3. Click on SHOW button to view all the errors. 4. In the grid following are the different fields present: a. Date - Date and Time of the occurrence of the error b. Batch No - During run, if there was any error then in which batch it occurred c. Description - Description of the error occurred d. Action - Action taken on the error occurrence is displayed in this column To print the details of the error log, user can click on PRINT button Column “Action” represents the severity of the error, which is as follows. Pause-P states that the sampling will be paused on occurrence of such errors during run. User may take corrective action and resume sampling by clicking on the Resume button from Status Monitor. Pause-R states that the sampling will be paused on occurrence of such errors during run. On occurrence of such errors, resume sampling in same batch is not possible. Once the results of all the tests in progress are declared, the batch run will stop. When the batch run is completed, user should take corrective action and then start the run again. STOP states that the analyzer will stop the batch run immediately on occurrence of such errors. Errors having blank Action states that they are warnings. Error description is displayed along with the date and time and also batch no if applicable. To print the details of the error log, user can click on Print button. Use EXPORT button to save the records in the excel sheet. On clicking, the details will be automatically copied in the excel sheet and the file is saved in the particular location. The location will be displayed in the Indication text box.
13.3.2.4. Measurement result error flags The measurement result flags printed out together with the measurement result are shown in the following list. Serial No.
Flags
Cause
1
#
This flag is issued to indicate that the result is obtained from an auto-rerun. This flag is issued for all rerun results.
2
F
This flag is used to indicate that correlation correction has been used to calculate and declare the final result. That is,
13-46
Service Manual
XL-200 this flag is issued when in the equation Y = aX + b, a is not 1 and/or b is not zero.
3
-1SD
This flag is issued with control results when the result is below 1SD limit.
4
+1SD
This flag is issued with control results when the result is above 1SD limit.
5
-2SD
This flag is issued with control results when the result is below 2SD limit.
6
+2SD
This flag is issued with control results when the result is above 2SD limit.
7
-3SD
This flag is issued with control results when the result is below 3SD limit.
8
+3SD
This flag is issued with control results when the result is above 3SD limit.
9
?SD
This flag is issued with control results when the target Mean and SD values have not been defined for the control in Consumables screen. Therefore, flags such as “±1SD”, “±2SD”, “±3SD” cannot be given.
10
CALC!
Calculated Item is not calculated for any of the following reasons. 1. Denominator is 0 (zero) in the process of calculation for compensation. 2. Test result to be used for Calculated Item has not been measured yet. 3. Any test to be used for Calculated Item has data/calibration alarms, such as NOCAL. 4. Any test to be used for Calculated Item errors (S*, R1* etc)
11
NOCAL
This flag is issued with patient or control result and indicates that the calibration table is not available for result calculation. The calibration table needs to be checked and corrected to calculate a result (e.g. calibration is not present or number of standards provided for calibration is less than required.
12
MONO
This flag is issued with patient and control results when, for the concerned test, the absorbance’s of the calibrators are not changing monotonically with their respective concentration in the calibration table.
13
V-D
This flag is issued with patient results and indicates a Decreased volume run.
14
V-I
This flag is issued with patient results and indicates Increased volume run.
15
PD
This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate that the sample was pre-diluted.
16
P*
This flag is issued with patient and control serum results to indicate that prozone (antigen excess) has occurred.
17
TEC-H
Upper technical limit violated. Measured value or absorbance slope is higher than the set maximum technical limit. (Set Maximum limit to zero to cancel the check for TEC-H flag.)
18
TEC-L
Lower technical limit violated. Measured value or absorbance slope is lower than the set minimum technical limit. (Set Minimum limit to zero to cancel the check for TEC-L flag.)
13-47
Service Manual 19
XL-200 RANGH
1. This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate that the absorbance of the sample is higher than the absorbance of the highest concentration calibrator in the calibration table for an increasing reaction direction test. 2. This flag is also issued with patient and control results if the absorbance of the sample is lower than the absorbance of the highest concentration calibrator in the calibration table for a decreasing reaction direction test.
20
RANGL
1. This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate that the absorbance of the sample is lower than the absorbance of the blank (or lowest concentration calibrator) in the calibration table for an increasing reaction direction test. 2. This flag is also issued with patient and control results if the absorbance of the sample is higher than the absorbance of the blank (or lowest concentration calibrator) in the calibration table for a decreasing reaction direction test.
21
EVH
This flag is issued with the patient result when the result is higher than the concentration of the highest calibrator and is calculated by extra-polating the calibration curve on higher side. Extrapolation % (maximum 20%) is set in system parameters.
22
EVL
This flag is issued with the patient result when the result is lower than the concentration of the lowest calibrator and is calculated by extra-polating the calibration curve, up to zero. Extrapolation % (maximum 20%) is set in system parameters.
23
H
Measured value is larger than upper limit set for normal value range for the corresponding age, sample type and category.
24
L
Measured value is smaller than lower limit set for normal value range for the corresponding age, sample type and category.
25
PANH
High Panic value alarm. This flag is issued with a sample result to indicate that the patient result is higher than the Upper Panic Limit programmed in Test Parameter for the corresponding age, sample type and category.
26
PANL
Low Panic value alarm. This flag is issued with a sample result to indicate that the patient result is lower than the Lower Panic Limit programmed in Test Parameter for the corresponding age, sample type and category.
27
LINxx
Linearity abnormal (checked only for Rate A and Rate B assays). When the reaction during measurement points M2S and M2E is non-linear beyond the set limit for linearity of reaction, this flag is given. The percent linearity of reaction is indicated by a two digit number xx after “LIN”.
28
Lim0
This flag is applicable for Rate Chemistries, only during the extension logic (Technical Limit is zero) and when Reaction Absorbance Limit is present (non-zero). If there is no measurement point available for result calculation, then this flag is issued and result will be “NA”.
29
Lim1
This flag is applicable for Rate Chemistries, only during the extension logic (Technical Limit is zero) and when Reaction Absorbance Limit is present (non-zero). If there is only one measurement point available for result calculation, then this flag is issued and result will be “NA”.
13-48
Service Manual
XL-200
30
Lim2
This flag is applicable for Rate Chemistries, only during the extension logic (Technical Limit is zero) and when Reaction Absorbance Limit is present (non-zero). If there are only 2 measurement points available for result calculation, then this flag is issued.
31
~
When Linearity Extension Logic method is used to reduce the measurement range to match absorbance range setting, this flag should be given. (Technical Limit is zero, Reaction Absorbance Limit is non-zero. More than 2 measurement points are available for result calculation)
32
AbsLim
This flag is issued for End-Point chemistries and Rate chemistries when the absorbance is beyond the Reaction Absorbance Limit set in Test Parameter. For Rate-chemistries, this flag will be issued when Technical limit is set. In this case, Extension Logic will not be applied.
33
RgtAbsMin
This flag indicates that the reagent 1 absorbance is lower than the programmed Reagent Absorbance Minimum.
34
RgtAbsMax
This flag indicates that the reagent 1 absorbance is greater than the programmed Reagent Absorbance Maximum.
35
???
This flag is issued when the denominator becomes zero during calculation or an overflow error occurs in logarithmic or exponential calculation.
36
@TMP
This flag is issued to photometric results when the RCT temperature was out of range while the measurement was in process. Flag is not applicable to ISE results.
37
TO
This flag indicates Time Out received from the analyzer, instead of the result.
38
Cal*
This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate that the results are being calibrated with previous calibration data.
39
CAL**
This flag is issued with patient and control results to indicate that the test is performed with Un-Calibrated Reagent. This flag is issued only when Online Calibration option (to trace Reagent Bottle change-over) is selected for a test from Test Parameter.
40
R1? /R2?
This flag is issued with the results when test is performed with the over-filled reagent volume during run. In this condition, the result will be declared with NA.
41
D?
This flag is issued with the result when the test is performed with overfilled Diluent or Urine ISE Diluent volume during run. In this condition, the result will be declared with NA.
42
COMM*
This flag is issued with the results in the following cases: Absorbance of Reading Area (M1S-M1E, M2S-M2E) is lost Absorbance after Reagent 1 addition is lost Absorbance after Reagent 2 addition is lost for 2Reagent chemistry. In this condition, the results will be declared with NA.
13-49
Service Manual
XL-200
13.3.3. Maintenance Menu To open maintenance screen, go to main screen, and click on the Maintenance on the left side of screen. The following screen will be displayed:
Figure 13-2. Maintenance screen
Using this screen, the routine maintenance of the analyzer is performed using the following function:
Span
Manual Span Auto Span Wash Dead Volume Calibration ISE (available only if ISE is installed on the analyzer) Auto Maintenance
13-50
Service Manual
XL-200
13.3.3.1. Auto Span This screen is useful to view and adjust the photometer gains at different wavelengths. The analyzer adjusts the photometer gains automatically if you selects Auto Span option and clicks on START button. If the gain obtained during auto span is within the factory set limits, it is indicated by a green background. And if the gain is not within the limits, then it is indicated by red background. The photometer gains can also be adjusted manually, however it is not recommended.
NOTE: If the absorbance of the DI Water placed inside the cuvette is not between 0.05-0.085 Abs, then following corrective measures should be taken. • Check the cuvette • Perform cuvette rinse to ensure that the cuvettes are clean • Check the particular wavelengths and the photometer lamp. • Call the service engineer The Auto Span option will be the default option when the Maintenance screen is clicked first time. Later it can be change, as appropriate.
13.3.3.2. Manual Span This screen is useful to view the filter absorbance and voltages at different wavelengths. It is also used to view the photometer stability at different wavelengths.
13-51
Service Manual
XL-200
Following is the procedure: 1. Select a wavelength using which the absorbance and voltage needs to be checked. 2. Click on START button. Continuous online update of voltage and absorbance takes place and is displayed on the screen. 3. Click on STOP once the check is performed. 4. User can select another wavelength to check the voltage and the absorbance at the other wavelength. Again user needs to click on START to start the reading and STOP to stop the reading.
13.3.3.3. Wash Screen The following screenshot shows the wash screen:
13.3.3.3.1. Cuvette Rinse On selecting option, the user can perform a Cuvette Wash of all 45 cuvettes by clicking on the Start button. This wash is done using DI Water. At the end of Cuvette Rinse, the cell blanks are updated automatically and can be seen by clicking on the tab under Maintenance menu:
13-52
Service Manual
XL-200
Figure 13-3. Cell blank screen
This menu enables the user to view the cuvette blank absorbance values (obtained with DI water in the cuvette) at any particular wavelength. The screen displays the cuvette blank for the requested wavelength. Wavelength can be selected by the pull-down option provided on the left side of the screen. The and buttons can also be used to view the cuvette blanks for the next and previous wavelength. There is also a GRAPH button available, through which the cell blank reading for particular wavelength can be viewed in a graphical format. The cuvette blank table consists of three sections.
13-53
Service Manual
XL-200
Figure 13-4. Cell blank graph
Present abs: It is the absorbance of the cuvettes with de-ionized water measured after the last run or Cuvette Rinse. Previous abs: It is the absorbance of the cuvettes with de-ionized water measured after the second last run or Cuvette Rinse. Graph: On clicking GRAPH button, the user can view the absorbances in graphical format for the required wavelength. To view the graph, you need to select the required wavelength from the Select Wavelength drop-down list, and then select the appropriate graph type from the Type option. Three options are available to view the graph: Present: This option will displays the previous absorbance graph obtained
for the selected wavelengths.
Previous: This option will displays the present absorbance graph obtained
for the selected wavelengths.
Both: The comparison of both graphs (previous and present) can be viewed
using this option.
The maximum and minimum acceptable value of the cuvette blank absorbance can be set in the Settings > System Parameter menu. If the absorbance of the cuvette blank exceeds the set maximum blank absorbance, then that particular cuvette absorbance is indicated by Red background. On the other hand, if the
13-54
Service Manual
XL-200
absorbance of the cuvette blank is below the minimum acceptable absorbance, then it is indicated by Blue background. The values on the cuvette blank value table display should not exceed 0.1 normally. Cuvette Rinse and/or Auto Wash procedure from Maintenance menu must be performed if the cuvette blanks are higher than the maximum limit. If the Cuvette O.D.s exceed 0.2 Absorbance, the cuvette should be replaced with a new cuvette or should be cleaned externally using fresh water. This procedure should be done daily before starting the batch. 13.3.3.3.2. Water Save This option enables the operator to wash the reaction tray cuvettes with some cleaning solution and fill all cuvettes with DI water at the end of a day’s work or at beginning of the day. This operation can be performed any time using Water Save option. To perform this, select WATER SAVE, and click START. On clicking this button, the analyzer first washes all the 45 cuvettes with the cleaning solution through laundry probes, and then using the Arm probe, the analyzer fills DI water in all the 45 cuvettes. This water remains in the cuvettes until the next run or cuvette wash/rinse. Overnight filling of the cuvettes with DI water is helpful in loosening the dirt on the cuvette walls. Perform water save daily, at the end of the day’s work. NOTE: Poor quality DI water should not be used for Water Save, as bacteria growth can take place inside the cuvettes. 13.3.3.3.3. Auto Wash
The cuvettes, arm probes, and stirrer can be cleaned with external detergents or cleaning solution through Auto Wash option. It is recommended to perform this procedure once a week or when needed. If one is using latex based assays regularly, it is recommended to perform a Cuvette Wash daily. Detergent or cleaning solution with appropriate concentration can be used for this operation. These solutions are not kept in the detergent Can but in reagent bottles on the Reagent Tray and in sample tubes on the Sample Tray.
13-55
Service Manual
XL-200
Auto Wash option can be used instead of Cuvette Rinse option, when operator wants to use external detergents/solutions to clean the cuvettes, probe, and stirrer. 1. Place 18 ml of Auto wash AC (Acid) Wash Solution at reagent position 1 and Auto Wash AL (Alkali) Wash solutions at reagent positions 3 on the reagent tray (in 50 ml large bottles). 2. Place 200 µl of Auto wash AC (Acid) Wash solution at sample position 1 and Auto Wash AL (Alkali) Wash solutions at sample positions 3 on the sample tray (in 2 ml Cups). 3. Click on START button. On clicking, a message box will be displayed indicating the user for placing cleaning solution.
4. Click OK to perform auto wash. If you want to stop the operation, you can click on the STOP button that is active after the Start button is clicked.
13-56
Service Manual
XL-200 NOTE: It is recommended to perform the Auto Wash once a week or when needed. If the user has not performed auto wash for 7 days, then on the next day, MultiXL reminds the user to perform Auto Wash by displaying a pop-up message on the right-bottom corner of the Status Monitor screen after first batch run of the day. Reminder pop-up will stay on screen, till user click on (Close) button. The pop-up message will remain on the screen, even after clicking Close button, if the mouse-pointer is placed on the pop-up. This reminder will be displayed once in a day.
The following buttons will be displayed after performing the auto wash operation: SHOW REPORT: This button will display the list of dates with time on which the auto-wash was performed. EXPORT: This option is used to download and save the auto-wash history in excel (.XLS) file in location C:\MultiXLLOG. 13.3.3.3.4. Probe Wash This option enables the operator to wash the Probe with Auto wash AC (Acid) Wash Solution and Auto Wash AL (Alkali) Wash solution at the end of a day’s work or at beginning of the day. This operation can be performed any time using this option. 1. Select the desired number of cycles from 01 – 09. 2. Click START button. On clicking, a prompt window will be displayed for the user to enter/confirm the position of the wash solution on the reagent tray. In case, if the wash solution is already defined through Utility > Reagent Position, on clicking START the prompt window will displays the position number where the wash solution is defined. You can edit the wash solution position by entering new position number. Refer figure below.
13-57
Service Manual
XL-200
Enter the wash solution position, and click OK, the Probe picks up the appropriate volume of wash solution (in µl) and dispenses it in the drain with internal and external cleaning. The Probe wash action is repeated based on the number of cycles selected. 3. After the action is completed the analyzer gets initialized. 13.3.3.3.5. Prime Wash This option is used at the beginning of the day before the Cuvette Rinse operation. The syringe valve of the Probe is kept ON (depending on the time set by the user: One or two minutes) to remove the air trapped inside the tubing. Also, the valves of the CRU tubing are kept open to remove the air trapped in them. The following operation occurs after the button is clicked: 1. Machine Initializes. 2. CRU goes in DOWN position in the RCT. 3. The syringe valves for CRU and Probe open sequentially. 4. The priming continues for “x” minutes. 5. After the priming operation is completed, the CRU initializes to home position.
13-58
Service Manual
XL-200
13.3.3.4. Dead Volume Calibration This screen enables the user to calibrate the Dead Volume for Sample Containers and Reagent Bottles. This procedure should be carried out at time of software installation (application or analyzer embedded). The procedure to carry out the Dead Volume Calibration is given below: 13.3.3.4.1. For Reagent Bottle Calibration
The following steps should be performed to carry out the Sample container calibration: 1. Select the appropriate Reagent bottle type available from the SELECT CONTAINER TYPE list for Dead Volume Calibration. 2. Pipette the exact amount displayed in Calibrate with Volume for the dead volume in the Reagent Bottle. 3. Place the Reagent bottle according to the bottle type on the position specified in the list. 4. Click CALIBRATE button. If the reagent volume present in the specified reagent bottle is not approximately equal to the volume with which it is to be calibrated, then message “Calibrated Value Out of Range of Specified Value” is displayed. Once the calibration process is completed, a message is displayed whether the calibration is successful or failed. If the calibration is successful then the values are automatically stored in the software.
13-59
Service Manual
XL-200
13.3.3.4.2. For Sample tube and Cup Calibration
The following steps should be done to carry out the Reagent Bottle calibration: 1. Select the appropriate Sample tube available from the SELECT CONTAINER TYPE list for Dead Volume Calibration. 2. Place the containers according to the container type on the position specified in the list. 3. Pipette the exact amount of volume in Calibrate with Volume for dead volume in sample tube. 4. Click CALIBRATE button. 5.
Once the calibration process is completed then it is automatically stored in the software.
NOTE: During calibration, if assembly error occurs; then the error message “Dead Volume Calibration Failed” will be displayed on the error message grid. 13.3.3.4.3. For Default Calibration
The following steps should be done to reset the Dead Volume Calibration to Default: User should click on DEFAULT button.
13-60
Service Manual
XL-200
1. Select the Container Types from the list for which the Dead volume calibration needs to be reset. 2. User can click on OK to reset the selected containers. NOTE: If the Application Software is changed, then the Dead Volume Calibration settings are updated automatically and it can also be updated from the instrument from Service Check > Read Current command. If any hardware program is changed, then the Dead Volume Calibration should be repeated again.
13.3.3.5. ISE This option is available only when Ion Selective Electrode unit is installed on the analyzer to perform routine maintenance, purging, cleaning and calibration on the ISE unit.
The following ISE maintenance commands are explained below: When the ISE ON button is clicked, the system will check for the volume of CAL A and CAL B. Once it is done, the lot number and expiry date of the ISE reagent pack will be displayed in the Lot No. and Expiry Date. There are various ISE commands available for ISE maintenance. To start the maintenance, click on the appropriate command and then click START. The following are the explanation of each command: PURGE A
This is used to purge Calibrant A solution through the tubing from the reagent module to the ISE Module. The ISE Module pumps Calibrant A from the reagent module through the ISE Module to wash out the flow path. On successful PURGE A cycle, it is indicated by green colored box. If it is failed, then red colored box will be displayed on the right side of the ISE maintenance screen.
13-61
Service Manual
XL-200
PURGE B
This is used to purge Calibrant B solution through the tubing from the reagent module to the ISE Module. The ISE Module pumps Calibrant B through the ISE Module to wash out the flow path. On successful PURGE B cycle, it is indicated by green colored box. If it is failed, then red colored box will be displayed on the right side of the ISE maintenance screen. CALIBRATION
This cycle is used to calibrate the electrodes (Na, K, Cl, and Li) of ISE Module. The ISE calibration range is as follows: Na
:52-64
K
:52-64
Cl
:40-55
Li
:47-64
On successful calibration cycle, if the values are in range, it is indicated by green colored box. If it is not in range, then coral (deep pink) colored box will be displayed.
13-62
Service Manual
XL-200
NOTE: Also, if the difference of the calibration values of (Na, K, Cl, Li) electrodes and calibration values of reference electrodes (Ref_Na, Ref_K, Ref_Cl, Ref_Li) are more than 1.5mV/decade, then the values are displayed in Yellow colored box and considered as Unsuccessful calibration. On clicking SHOW REPORT, it will display the last 30 calibration values. See figure as shown below.
The column Status displays the status of the electrodes after calibration. NOTE: Scroll the horizontal bar to view the complete report.
The appropriate status (Partial, Failed or Pass) will be displayed on the basis of following conditions:
Pass: If all electrodes are calibrated successfully. Partial: If at least any one of the electrodes is calibrated successfully.
13-63
Service Manual
XL-200
Failed: All electrodes are unsuccessfully calibrated. CLEAN
This command is used to remove protein build-up from the ISE Module electrodes. The Clean command should be performed once per 24-hour period. On successful operation, it is indicated by green colored box. If it is failed, then Coral (deep pink) colored box will be displayed. PUMP CALIBRATION
This cycle is used to calibrate the peristaltic pumps of the ISE Module. On successful operation, it is indicated by green colored box. If it is failed, then Coral (deep pink) colored box will be displayed.
BUBBLE CALIBRATION
The bubble calibration command is used to allow the module to reestablish a baseline for detecting air-liquid interfaces. It can also be used as a diagnostic tool to see if the bubble detector is functioning properly. On successful operation, it is indicated by green colored box. If it is failed, then Coral (deep pink) colored box will be displayed. MAINTENANCE
This is used to clear fluid from the flow path of the ISE Module, and to pause the Sip Cycle. The Sip Cycle is used to refresh the Calibrant A in front of the electrodes. Every 30 minutes after the last sample is run, the ISE Module will automatically run a Sip Cycle. No command is required from the host analyzer to initiate a Sip Cycle. The ISE Module automatically clears the flow path, next the ISE Module dispenses 36 μL of Calibrant B into the Sample Entry Port, and it pulls it past the electrodes using the waste pump.
13-64
Service Manual
XL-200
The ISE Module then dispenses 95 μL of Calibrant A into the sample entry port, and positions it in front of the electrodes. On successful operation, it is indicated by green colored box. If it is failed, then coral (deep pink) colored box will be displayed. PRIME A
This command is used to prime Calibrant A solution from the reagent pack. It is performed after installing the new ISE Reagent Pack. PRIME B
This command is used to prime Calibrant B solution from the reagent pack. It is performed after installing the new ISE Reagent Pack. SHOW BUBBLE CALIBRATION
This command is used to display the bubble calibration values. SHOW LAST SLOPE CALCULATED
This command is used to display last calibration values for the Na, K, Cl, and Li. SHOW ISE PUMP CALIBATION
This command is used to display the ISE pump calibration values. READ ISE VERSION
This command is used to display the ISE module software version. On clicking ISE ON button, the system will check for the (calculated) volume of Calibrant A and Calibrant B. In case, if the remaining (calculated) volume of any Calibrant is less than
10% of the total Volume then the message “ISE Reagent Pack Volume Low (Less than 10% of Total Volume)” will be displayed in error grid and logged in the database. This message is only for the user information.
In case, if the remaining (calculated) volume of any Calibrant is below the
respective threshold level, then the alert message “ISE Reagent Pack Volume Very Low (Less than 3 Days Sip)” will be displayed with RED background in error grid.
13-65
Service Manual
XL-200
Once the check is completed, the ISE reagent pack Lot Number and Expiry date will be displayed in the Maintenance screen. However, you can proceed with RUN and other maintenance activities. 13.3.3.5.1. Checking ISE Pack Details The ISE pack details can be view by ISE PACK button, through the Status Monitor screen. These details are viewable only before starting the run as this option is disabled during the run. On clicking this button, the ISE reagent pack information will be displayed which contains. Lot Number, Installation Date and Expiry Date of current ISE Reagent Pack Details of all ISE Calibration values Remaining ISE Reagent Volume Indicator (approximate remaining volume
of Calibrant A and Calibrant B; whichever is lesser).
13-66
Service Manual
XL-200
NOTE: The system detects New / Change in ISE Reagent Pack only on interacting with ISE module (by clicking ISE ON from the Maintenance screen or on starting the ISE run) or during Auto Maintenance operations. Hence, if the user clicks ISE Details button just after (physically) installing the New ISE Reagent Pack, system will displays the ISE Details of the earlier Reagent Pack. On detecting (and registering) new ISE Reagent Pack, Backup of ISE inventory data of earlier Reagent Pack will be taken by the system on the analyzer PC. During ISE Sampling (Serum/Urine Samples), ISE inventory is updated even on the occurrence of Time Out/Error received in ISE result string from analyzer.
13.3.3.6. Auto Maintenance By default, the auto maintenance start-up actions are performed automatically at the beginning of the day when the application is started first time. This is an automatic service action that does not require manual intervention. This operation can be initiated any time from the AUTO MAINTENANCE option from the Maintenance screen:
13-67
Service Manual
XL-200
NOTE: If any error occurred during the maintenance operation, it will reattempt to perform auto maintenance for 3 times. There are some series of actions performed during the auto maintenance startup and shut down operation. 13.3.3.6.1. Operation performed during Auto Maintenance at Startup Startup 1. Priming of laundry unit and SRPT probe with DI water for one minute (automatic step). 2. Auto Span operation (automatic step). 3. Cuvette rinse operation (automatic step). 4. Perform priming of SRPT syringe for one minute (automatic step).
13.3.3.6.2. Operation performed during Auto Maintenance at Shutdown Shutdown 1. Analyzer initialization. 2. Volume scan of cleaning solution. 3. Cuvette rinse operation of 11 cuvettes. 4. Probe cleaning with cleaning solution for 3 times. 5. Internal and External probe cleaning with DI water in trough for 3 times. 6. Probe cleaning with DI water for 3 times. 7. Water save operation 8. Shutdown
13.3.3.6.3. Steps to initiate Auto Maintenance at Startup NOTE: The auto-maintenance at startup is initiated to perform automatically when the analyzer and computer are turned on for the first time each day. To perform auto startup action manually, do the following: 1. In the Maintenance screen, select START-UP from the AUTO MAINTENANCE frame.
2. Click START. On clicking, the following window will be displayed.
13-68
Service Manual
XL-200
3. Click OK to continue with the maintenance. This will start the auto maintenance operation. 13.3.3.6.4. Steps to initiate Auto Maintenance at Shutdown To perform auto shutdown manually, do the following: 1. In the Maintenance screen, select SHUTDOWN from the AUTO MAINTENANCE frame.
2. Click START. On clicking, the following window will be displayed.
Put the required amount of cleaning solution on the mentioned reagent and sample position, and then click OK. This will start the maintenance operation and the instrument will be shut down once it is completed .
13-69
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
13-70
Service Manual
XL-200
14. Introduction to ISE Module ISE (Electrolyte Measurement System) is placed on extreme left side of the chemistry analyzer, and it measures the concentration of Na, K, Cl and Li of serum, plasma or diluted urine with the ion electrodes. The ISE unit consists of ISE module, ion electrode and three pumps, two for supply and other for waste. ISE module
This module consists of electrodes (Na, K, Cl, Li and Reference) and pumps. Measurement of concentration is done at electrodes and rinses/calibrates after every measurement Communication to the analyzer is carried out through RS232C.
Ion electrode
This unit consists of Na, K, Cl, Li and Reference electrodes.
Cal A pump
This pump supplies Calibrant-A into ISE module.
Cal B pump
This pump supplies Calibrant-B into ISE module.
Waste pump
This pump drains liquid from ISE module.
All waste liquid are discharged into the external tank for high concentration waste liquid. The Module is completely self-contained. All sample and Calibrant positioning within the module is controlled by an integral microprocessor, which assures reliable electrode operation and maximum lifetime. The electrolyte measurement system’s microprocessor applies proprietary mathematical algorithms to electrode output voltages, converting them to clinical units of mmol/L.
14-1
Service Manual
XL-200
14.1. Four Channel ISE Module Mechanical
Figure 14-1. Front View
Figure 14-2 Rear View
14-2
Service Manual
XL-200
14-3 Transasia ISE Module
14-3
Service Manual
XL-200
Figure 14-4 ISE Module
14-4
Service Manual
XL-200
Figure 14-5 Interconnection tubing diagram
14.2. ISE Technical Specification 14.2.1. Four Channel ISE Sample type
Serum, Plasma or Urine (Urine requires dilution)
Sample size
70 µl serum 140 µl diluted urine
Analysis time
Serum – 35 seconds, including one point calibration Urine – 40 seconds, including one point calibration
Throughput
Serum – 100 samples per hour Urine – 90 samples per hour
Power
24V DC, 1.0A (SMPS, four channel ISE)
Module Size
161 mm high x 65.5 mm wide x 98.6 mm deep
Reagent Pack includes
Calibrant A, Calibrant B
Other Reagents
Cleaning Solution, Urine Diluent
Operating Ambient Temperature
15°C - 32°C
14-5
Service Manual
XL-200
14.3. ISE Measurement Theory The electrolyte measurement system measures Sodium, Potassium and Chloride ions in biological fluids using ion selective electrode technology. A diagram of the electrode measurement system.
Figure 14-6. Schematic diagram for electrolyte measurement system
The flow-through electrodes use selective membrane tubing, specially formulated to be sensitive to the respective ions. The potential of each electrode is measured relative to a fixed, stable voltage established by the double junction Silver/Silverchloride reference electrode. An ion-selective electrode develops a voltage that varies with the concentration of the ion to which it responds. The relationship between the voltage developed and the concentration of the sensed ion is logarithmic, as expressed by the Nernst equation: E Eo
RT log( C ) nf
Where: E
= the potential of the electrode in sample solution
14-6
Service Manual Eo
XL-200
= the potential developed under standard conditions
RT/nF = A temperature dependent “constant”, termed the slope log
= Base ten logarithm function
α
= Activity coefficient of the measured ion in the solution
C
= Concentration of the measured ion in the solution
14.4. Electrodes and Reagents Used Electrodes used in the ISE module. The electrodes are maintenance-free and are warranted on a prorated basis for up to 10,000 samples or 6 months, whichever occurs first, Cleaning Solution aspirated from an operator designated sample cup, is used at least once a day at the end of the day in order to minimize protein buildup in the fluid lines. A two-point calibration of the ISE module is also done at least once a day at the beginning of the first sample run. If the user is running more than 50 samples a day, cleaning and calibration must be performed after completion of 50 samples. The entire double-junction reference electrode is disposable. The reference electrode is filled with sufficient KCl so that no filling solution must be added during the lifetime of the electrode. The lifetime of the reference electrode is 6 months or 10,000 samples. No addition of internal filling solution is required for this electrode. Electrodes require Calibrant A sampling at 30-minute intervals for reliable operation, but this is completely controlled by the electrolyte measurement system without any need for operator intervention. The electrodes require a 10 times sample dilution for measurement of urine so user has to keep 10 times diluted (urine sample to urine diluent ratio 1:9) urine sample for the analysis of electrolytes in urine samples. It is not necessary to regulate the electrode housing temperature if its environmental temperature does not exceed 32 ºC. Reagents used in the ISE Module: The sample is aspirated from a sample cup and dispensed into the sample port at the top of the ISE module by the sample probe. The sample is then positioned in front of the sensors using the double detector and the waste pump. Four reagents are needed to operate the ISE module: Calibrant A: Used as wash solution and single-point calibrator. Calibrant A is pumped into the sample port by the Calibrant A pump and then positioned in front of the sensors. A volume of 180 µl is sufficient for each serum sample run and 100 µl is sufficient for each urine sample run. Calibrant B: Used as the second point in two-point calibration. Calibrant B is pumped into the sample port by the Calibrant B pump and then positioned in front of the sensors. A volume of 180 µl is sufficient for each urine sample run.
14-7
Service Manual
XL-200
Cleaning Solution: Should be run once a day to prevent protein buildup or at 8 hour intervals if the ISE module performs more than 50 samples per day. Cleaning Solution may be aspirated from a sample cup. 500 µl is sufficient for one day's requirements. Urine Diluent: This is required for urine samples. Urine samples must be diluted by a factor of 10 (urine sample to urine diluent ratio of 1:9) to perform urine measurement. The operator must keep the urine diluent on the Reagent Tray.
14.5. Urine ISE Dilution Rerun Urine ISE sample should be Re-run with different Dilution ratio (increase / decrease Sample volume), based on the Result flags in the order of K, Na then Cl. The ISE Urine sample is performed with 10X dilution during its first run. During ISE-rerun, the 3X and 15X dilutions may be performed, depending upon the flag attached to the result (based on increased or decreased sample volume). On receiving the result, the test will go for rerun on the following conditions:
If the sample result is attached with PANH flag, then sample will go for rerun with normal dilution that is 1:9 (10X). If the sample result is attached with RANGH flag, then the sample will go for rerun with decreased sample volume that is 1:14 (15X) dilution.
After receiving the result for the sample replicates, if both the replicates are attached with different flag that is RANGH (requiring decrease rerun) and RANGL (requiring increase rerun). But the priority of RANGH is higher so this sample will go for a Re-run with decrease sample volume. The number of replicates sent to Rerun will be the same as number of replicates sent during the 1st (original) determination. NOTE: The software will display re-run result (after applying the volume correction) for only those tests having flags that required re-run. The Attach Rerun Flag (“#”) and Volume Increase/ Volume Decrease Flag (“V-I”/ “V-D”) will be displayed after correcting the results. Flags H, L, PANH, PANL , RANGH and RANGL will be applicable to ISE results
14.6. Storage and Usage of the Reagents 1. Store all solutions in a dark and cool place at room temperature. 2. Don't preserve the reagents such as or cleaning solution once they are dispensed to sample cup. 3. Don't use the expired solution. 4. When opening new bottle for a solution, don't mix remaining solution from the previous bottle. 5. Reagent Pack has one month of on board stability.
14-8
Service Manual
XL-200
14.7. Turning Off the Power As Calibrant-A and Calibrant-B is automatically dispensed into ISE unit every 30 minutes to prevent electrodes from drying out; it is not recommended to turn off the main power supply of the analyzer. Switch off only the analyzer at the end of the day. This will keep the above function activated. When the Calibrant remains in fluid path for over two hours without flowing, the Na ion from reference electrode can reach Na electrode and saturate the membrane resulting in effected Na measurement. When the power to the analyzer needs to be turned off for a reason such as maintenance, follow the procedure below to purge Calibrant-A solution in the path. Also refer to the procedure when turning off the power for more than several hours, as it requires storage of the electrodes.
14.8. Shutdown Procedure 14.8.1. Preparing the ISE Module for Storage If the laboratory plans to store the ISE module for a period greater than one week, during which the analyzer will not be connected to power, the following steps should be performed: Before removing the electrodes, they should be cleaned using the cleaning solution and then running 3 Purge A cycles from the Maintenance > ISE.
14.8.2. Reference, Na + and Cl- Electrodes Depress the compression plate and remove all electrodes, including the
reference electrode from the ISE Module. +
-
Place the Na and Cl electrodes into individual sealed bags. Reinsert the Reference Electrode flow path line with yellow flag, if available,
and then put into individual sealed bags.
14.8.3. K+ and Li+ Electrode Aspirate a small volume of Calibrant A from the top port of the reagent pack
into a syringe fitted with a blunt needle.
+
+
+
+
Inject sufficient Calibrant A into the lumen of the K and Li electrodes until
fluid fills the lumen.
Cover both ends of the lumen (both sides of the K and Li electrodes) with
tape to hold the Calibrant A in place. +
+
Insert the K and Li electrodes into a sealed bag.
14.8.4. Reagent Pack Remove the Reagent pack from the analyzer and discard it.
14-9
Service Manual
XL-200
14.8.5. Analyzer Tubing Remove all the fluidic tubing and thoroughly rinse with DI water.
14.8.6. Analyzer Re-activation Remove all electrodes from the sealed bags. Remove tape from K+ and Li+ electrode. If necessary, soak the reference electrode in warm water until the lumen of
the electrode has been cleared of salt build-up.
Install electrodes into the ISE Module. Connect new reagent pack to the ISE Module. Use Prime Cycles to prime the Calibrants. Calibrate analyzer.
14.9. ISE Calibration It is mandatory to perform calibration (two points) before ISE measurement. It is recommended to make it a routine operation to run calibration before running first sample of the day. One point calibration is automatically performed at each sample processing by Calibrant-A and Calibrant-B is used for two-point calibration. The calibration is required at the following cases: IMPORTANT: The power switch of analyzer is turned off. Eight hours have passed since the last ISE calibration. Environmental temperature has changed more than 4 °C since the last ISE
calibration.
More than 50 samples are processed after ISE Calibration in the morning.
14.9.1. Procedure for ISE Calibration Before starting analysis of sample for electrolytes, user should first clean and calibrate the ISE module. The following sequence should be used for ISE unit calibration: 1. Install the Reagent Pack and connect it to the ISE module. If the Reagent Pack is already in place, shake it gently. 2. Pour the Cleaning solution into the sample cup and place on the ISE2 position of the standard sample tray. 3. Go to the Maintenance from the main menu screen.
14-10
Service Manual
XL-200
4. Click ISE ON button. 5. Select PURGE A and click START. On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant A from the reagent pack and dispenses it into the sample entry port to wash out the electrode flow path. Repeat the procedure if required. 6. Select PURGE B and click START. On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant B from the reagent pack and dispenses it into the sample entry port to wash out the electrode flow path. Repeat the procedure if required. 7. Select PURGE A and click START. 8. On clicking, the ISE Module pumps 100 μl of Calibrant A from the reagent pack and dispenses it into the sample entry port to wash out the electrode flow path. Repeat the procedure if required. 9. After completion of purge cycles, select CLEAN, and then click START. On clicking, the analyzer dispenses 100 μl of cleaning solution and 180 μl of Calibrant A in the sample entry port during the cleaning process. 10. After cleaning cycle is over, perform 6 to 8 PURGE A cycles. Now the system is ready for calibration. 11. Select CALIBRATION and click START. This command is used to calibrate the electrodes of the ISE Module. The ISE Module then cycles Calibrant B and Calibrant A solutions in front of the electrodes and measures the millivolt output of the electrodes for each of the respective solutions. These mV readings are then used to set up a relationship between sample concentration and electrode mV output. The change in mV per change in concentration is the slope of the electrode. The slope of the electrodes is reported in mV /dec (mV per decade change in concentration), and should be within the following limits: Li+ 47-64 mV/dec Na+ 52-64 mV/dec K+ 52-64 mV/dec Cl- 40-55 mV/dec After the calibration process is completed, electrode calibration slopes are displayed on the right side of screen. If any error occurs during the calibration process, the error code is also displayed in the error message grid. If the slopes are within range then a box with green color is displayed. If slopes are out of range then a box with coral (deep pink) color is displayed. The previous calibration details with date and time along with the
14-11
Service Manual
XL-200
slope values can be viewed. To view them select CALIBRATION, and then click SHOW REPORT. If the electrode calibration slopes are in the acceptable range, the electrolyte measurement system is ready for the sample analysis. For Serum samples 70 μl and for Urine 140 μl (10 times diluted with urine diluent) of sample is required for the Electrolyte measurement. The slope is defined as:
Where CA = Calibrant A concentration in mmol/L CB = Calibrant B concentration in mmol/L EA = ISE Potential developed in Calibrant A solution in mV EB = ISE Potential developed in Calibrant B solution in mV 12. To perform Pump Calibration, select PUMP CALIBRATION and click on START. 175 μl of Calibrant A solution and 375 μl of Calibrant B solution are dispensed in the sample port. Once the process is completed successfully, values for all the 3 pumps CAL A, CAL B and Waste are displayed. If the values are between 1500 and 3000, calibration is displayed OK with green colored box else it is displayed NOK with red colored box. 13. To perform Bubble Calibration, select the option BUBBLE CALIBRATION and click on START button. 75 μl of Calibrant A solution is dispensed in the sample port. Bubble calibration allows the module to reestablish a baseline for detecting air-liquid interface. It can be used as a diagnostic tool to see if the bubble detector is functioning properly. If the process is successful without any error it is displayed OK with green colored box else it is displayed NOK with red colored box.
14.10. Maintenance Schedule The Electrolyte Measurement System has been designed to require very little operator maintenance. The only daily maintenance required is to run the Cleaning Solution after the last sample of the day. All other parts and expendables are replacement items (see schedule below). Recommended Maintenance/Replacement Schedule (low volume user). Pump Cassette +
Na Electrode
: 9 months : 6 months
+
: 6 months
-
: 6 months
K Electrode Cl Electrode
14-12
Service Manual
XL-200
Li+ Electrode
: 6 months
Reference Electrode
: 6 months
Reagent
: Refill reagent as required by testing needs
Recommended Maintenance/Replacement Schedule (greater than 100 samples/day Pump Cassette
: 6 months
Na+ Electrode
: 10,000 samples
K+ Electrode
: 10,000 samples
Cl- Electrode
: 10,000 samples
Li+ Electrodes
: 10,000 samples
Reference Electrode
: 10,000 samples
Reagent
: Refill reagent as required by testing needs
14.11. Acceptable Calibration Ranges The following are the acceptable calibration values displayed at the bottom of the screen after completion of an ISE calibration. Na+
:Slope 52 to 64 mV / Decade
+
:Slope 52 to 64 mV / Decade
-
:Slope 40 to 55 mV / Decade
K
Cl
Li+
:Slope 47 to 64 mV / Decade
14.12. Troubleshooting Symptom
Cause
System does not respond
1. No power
Low Slope Na + or K+ Xilinx 8.2i > Accessories > IMPACT for starting the software.
15-3
Service Manual
XL-200
13. Select cancel on new project dialogue box. 14. Double click on the Direct SPI Configuration on the left window. Now place the mouse pointer on right side. 15. Right click and choose Add SPI device option (or press Control + D). Now a browse dialogue box will appear. Browse and select the 'mcs' file to be downloaded. See figure below.
16. Select the M25P16 from the part name list box, and then click OK. See figure below.
15-4
Service Manual
XL-200
17. On clicking, the FPGA graphical chip will appear with the selected mcs file name. Place the mouse pointer on the graphical chip, right click and choose Program. See figure below.
18. The Programming Property dialog box will appears. Keep it as default settings, and click OK. See figure below.
19. The CPU board will be successfully programmed if no ERRORS are detected at the end of the verification process. See figure below of impact utility after successful Programming of the CPU board.
15-5
Service Manual
XL-200
If any ERRORS are reported during the process, reprogram the CPU using same method.
20. After successful programming process, turn the CPU board off and place the jumper JP2 between (2-3). The CPU board is ready to operate the analyzer logic. Mount it on interface board carefully. 21. Follow the same steps for programming the CPU board connected on interface board, without connecting the power connecter as CPU board gets power from interface board itself.
15.2. Programming PDC and RCT Heater XL-200 analyzer systems have a dedicated microcontroller based systems for performing PDC operations and controlling RCT Heater temperature. Following steps will explain programming of these micro-controllers. For programming the micro-controllers, following accessories are required: Flash Programming utility from SiLabs (Given in CD as UtilDLL). USB debug adapter, a Microcontroller Programming Module form SiLabs. USB Cable for connecting PC USB port with USB debug adapter. 2 x 10 Flat Ribbon cable for connecting the microcontroller programming
port.
PCB connection.
Follow the steps for downloading the program:
15-6
Service Manual
XL-200
1. Make the connections with the target board. Make sure that the analyzer is turned OFF while you are making these connections. 2. Run the FlashUtil.exe. 3. On the Silicon Laboratories Flash Utility property sheet, select Connect/Disconnect tab. 4. Define the appropriate parameters as highlighted in the blue box in figure below. NOTE: Select C2 for RCT and JTAG for PDC.
5. Once the appropriate parameters are selected, click Connect. This will make the software connection with the target.
15-7
Service Manual
XL-200
6. Select Download Hex File/Go/Stop tab, select the appropriate file from the desired location, and then click Download.
7. On clicking, it takes 20 to 25 seconds to download the program. 8. Turn off the power supply and remove the cable connection with the target board. The board is now ready to use.
15-8
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
15-9
Service Manual
XL-200
16. Pressure Settings 16.1. Digital Pressure Indicator
16.2. Access for Different Settings
16-1
Service Manual
XL-200
16.3. HI/LO Pressure Setting Procedure
1. Connect the digital pressure module connector on the Base Board 2 PCB “PRE SENSOR”. Connector > Insert tubing > Turn on machine. 2. Press increase push button
more than 3 to 4 seconds.
3. Set pressure upper level P1 = 1.20 (Use up/DN key for increase or decrease pressure) Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter P2. 4. Set pressure level lower P2 = 0.80 (Use up/DN key for increase or decrease pressure) after 4 to 5 seconds the display will come in normal mode.
16-2
Service Manual
XL-200
16.4. Mode Configuration
Set the basic pressure switch settings as mentioned below 1. Press MODE KEY for 3 sec. 2. Digital pressure indicator in the configuration mode select a. Pressure unit. = bar.
16-3
Service Manual
XL-200 Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter.
b. Detection mode (General purpose) = F-1. Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter. c. Operating mode (Standard) = std. Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter. d. Control output = no. Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter. e. Zero shift input = in. Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter. f. Chatter prevention, set response time. = 5 (msec). Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter. g. Display color (When pressure within limit Green and when out of limit red.) = rGr. Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter. h. Power mode (Standard) = nor. Press Mode key for save and going to next parameter. i.
After above setting press Mode key Module will display the present pressure.
To Lock key pad to avoid changes in Parameter Setting > Press and hold either UP or DN key at least 3 seconds while pressing Mode key will lock the key pad and wait till LOC display to flash. The same key combination will deactivate the Key lock feature.
16.5. Error Check during Run 1. Adjust the pressure with help of pinch valve > Increase pressure above 1.20 bar. Color of reading on pressure display turns from Green to Red above 1.20 bar. 2. Adjust pressure at 1 bar. Color of pressure display changes from Red to Green below 1.15 bar pressure. (Green color from 0.80 to 1.20 bar). 3. During run decrease pressure from 0.9 bar to 0.5 bar. When pressure goes below 0.80 bars on application screen error appeared “Check pressure level” and sampling get paused. 4. Increase pressure from 0.50 to 0.90 bars. When pressure goes above 0.85 bar Error message get disappeared from application screen and sampling get start for remaining schedule.
16-4
Service Manual
XL-200
5. During run increase the pressure from 0.90 to 1.25 bars. When pressure goes up above the 1.20 bar, the pressure error displayed on application screen and pressure indicator color change from green to red. 6. When pressure decreases below 1.15 bar indicator color change from red to green and error message get disappeared from application screen and start sampling again for pending schedule paused.
16-5
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
16-6
Service Manual
XL-200
17. Replacement, Alignment, Calibration, and Verification Procedure 17.1. Replacement Procedure 17.1.1. Lamp Replacement Procedure 1. Turn off the analyzer. 2. Remove RCT cover.
3. Remove cuvette retaining plate.
Remove Cuvette numbering plate unscrewing nuts
17-1
Service Manual
XL-200
4. Open RCT Tray quarter cover.
Remove RCT tray quarter plate by unscrewing
5. Rotate RCT table & loosen Lamp terminals.
Rotate RCT table window to view proper lamp terminals. Loosen the lamp terminal.
6. Loosen lamp fixing grub screw.
Loosen Lamp fixing grub screw
17-2
Service Manual
XL-200
7. Remove the lamp.
8. Fix a new lamp. Take new lamp clean it properly to avoid any finger impression. Place halogen lamp gently & tighten the grub screw. Fix lamp connection & tighten backlit Lamp terminals.
9. Fix the RCT quarter plate. Close RCT quarter cover. Re-fix removed screws.
10. Fix cuvette number plate. Ensure Alignment of RCT & laundry unit, before switch on machine. Switch ON the analyzer & check the photometer beam. NOTE: The photometer lamp replacement should be done by welltrained authorized person only.
17-3
Service Manual
XL-200
17.1.2. Probe Replacement Procedure 1. Turn off the analyzer. 2. Remove the probe tube gently; ensure water drop will not fall on the level sensing PCB.
. 3. Remove 2 pin connector, ensure probe wire and crimp terminal removed properly.
4. Loosen the probe by unscrewing the screw using screw driver as shown in figure below.
17-4
Service Manual
XL-200
5. Lift up the probe gently.
6. Clean the probe by inserting it into the wash solution (Extran wash solution) or take new probe.
7. Insert the probe properly back on the arm. 8. Insert the probe tube back into its place and ensure that the tube is properly connected.
17-5
Service Manual
XL-200
9. Connect the 2 pin connector properly. Check the physical alignment; ensure probe height (Refer section 17.1.3 Probe Alignment procedure for more details. Switch on the analyzer, Initialize all the assemblies. Check the internal probe cleaning by switching on the respective syringe CKD valve, ensure no leakage. Confirm arm alignment before start the bio-chemistry run.
17.1.3. Probe Alignment 1. Gauge for probe height alignment
Reference 12mm height gauge
2. Remove the cuvette number plate. 1. Initialize the arm assembly 2. Initialize the RCT assembly for Sample Probe alignment. 3. Remove cuvette number plate
3. Remove cuvette holding segment
17-6
Service Manual
XL-200
Remove cuvette holding segment, nearer to cuvette which aligns under the probe when move the probe towards RCT in service check.
4. Jig placement
Place the 12mm gauge properly on the cuvette which is come under the probe when move the probe towards RCT in service check.
5. Height with respect to Jig & Verification.
1. Rotate the arm toward cuvette using necessary Service Check commands. 2. Check the gap or interference between probe tip and gauge center. Probe tip should touch to 12mm gauge to get the require probe height. 3. If required, adjust the probe height by adjusting the up-down / vertical opto sensor to get the above condition.
NOTE: Ensure that the jig is clean before using. After height setting process is completed, it is recommended to check the respective cuvette at particular location where the jig was placed for any particle’s left out in cuvette.
17-7
Service Manual
XL-200
17.2. Calibration Procedure 17.2.1. RCT Temperature Verification ITEM REQUIRED: Temperature indicator with resolution of 0.01 °C. and accuracy 0.1 °C 1. Power ON Machine 2. Remove CRU from CRU shaft. 3. Pour 300µl DI water in cuvette No.11, 22, 33, 44 and insert temperature indicator probes. 4. Record the room temperature & s/w screen display temperature before taking cuvettes readings. Ambient temperature= ---------°C. S/W display temperature = ---------°C. 5. Note down first reading after 30 minutes and next 3 readings at 10 minutes interval in table Temperature should be 37± 0.2°C. TIME INTERVAL
TEMP. IN CUVETTE NO:- 11
TEMP. IN CUVETTE NO:22
TEMP. IN CUVETTE NO:-33
TEMP. IN CUVETTE NO:-44
10 min 20 min 30 min 40min 50min 60min
6. Turn OFF the machine > Remove temperature indicator probe from respective cuvette. Mount CRU on CRU shaft.
17.2.2. RGT Temperature Calibration Procedure
The following parameters can be controlled by the RGT unit: Set point of the controller for compressor 1 and compressor 2 Heating or cooling function.
17-8
Service Manual
XL-200
Maximum high temperature limit and alarm. Minimum low temperature limit and alarm. Differential (Hysteresis) Probe calibration. Time delay (relay restart after cutoff) Keypad lock. Relay status on probe failure. Restore factory defaults. End Programming and keypad functions.
Follow these instructions to set the parameters for compressor 1 and compressor 2: 1. Turn on the analyzer. 2. To change the set point of compressor 1, press SET key for two seconds and then release. 3. Display will show C1 (channel 1) and flashes. 4. Press SET key again, and set the appropriate temperature using up and down key. 5. Press SET key to save the temperature in the memory. 6. Once the temperature is set, you will see “—“which confirms that the temperature has stored in the memory. 7. To change the set point of compressor 2, press SET key for two seconds and then release. 8. Display will show C1 (channel 1) and flashes. Use up and down key to change C1 to C2 (channel 2). 9. Press SET key again, and set the appropriate temperature using up and down key. 10. Press SET key to save the temperature in the memory. 11. To end the temperature setting mode, press SET key. 12. Once the set key is pressed, the controller goes to the normal mode and displays the temperature. The set points will be recorded in the memory. 13. Refer the following instructions for more details.
17-9
Service Manual
XL-200
Press & Hold "SET" Key for 2 sec. & release. Display will show C1 for channel 1 & Flash
CH1 - For Cooling. With the help of Arrow key, Set "SET" temp. to 4 °C as Set Point for control action & to save in to memory press "SET Key". Display will show “---" as an indication of parameter saving in to memory.
17-10
Service Manual
XL-200
CH2 - For Heating. With the help of Arrow key, Set "SET" temperature to 37 °C as a Set Point for control action & to save in to memory, Press "SET key" to save. Display will show "--- "as an indication of parameter saving
EP to End of Program for SET point of CH1, CH2.
Follow these instructions to set the other parameters. 1. Press PRG key for two seconds and then release. 2. Display will show P1 and flashes. 3. Use up and down key to change the appropriate parameter, and press SET key to confirm. 4. Again use up and down key to change the appropriate channel (C1 or C2), and press SET key to set the range. 5. Set the appropriate range, and the press SET to save the settings. 6. Refer the following instructions for more details.
17-11
Service Manual
XL-200
Press & Hold "PRG" key for 2 second. The display will show P1 for channel 1 parameter setting.
P1 value for CH1 - 0: For Cooling to be selected by UP/DN Key P1 Value for CH2 - 1 For Heating to be selected by UP/DN Key.
17-12
Service Manual
XL-200
Press SET Key to change Parameter P2 -CH1 Maximum Temperature. to be set to 12 °C with the help of UP/DN Key. CH2 Max. Temp. to be set to 40 °C with the help of UP/DN Key to indicate Error as "Ht"
Press SET Key to change Parameter P3 - CH1 - Min. temp. to be set to 2 °C with the help of UP/DN Key. CH2 - Min. Temp to be set to 31 °C with the help of UP/DN Key to indicate Error as "Lt".
17-13
Service Manual
XL-200
Press SET Key to change Parameter P2 CH1 Differential temperature. Set to 4 °C to restart control action on 12 °C w.r.t. Set Temp. 4 °C CH2 - Differential temperature to be set to 3 °C to restart control action on 36 °C with the help of UP/DN Key w.r.t. Set temp. 37 °C
CH1: 0 CH2: 0
17-14
Service Manual
XL-200
Select P6 & Press SET key to change parameter. With the help of UP/DN Key set CH1 to 1 minute. CH2 to 1 minute.
To lock parameter setting, Select LP & Press SET key after LP function with the help of UP/DN Key To Unlock Keypad Select "0". To Lock Keypad select "1".
17-15
Service Manual
XL-200
To Set relay status after Probe failure, Select E1 function & press "SET" Key. CH1 - With the help of UP/DN Key Set to "1" to make relay duty cycle of 10 min. ON & 4 minutes OFF. CH2 - With the help of UP/DN Key Set to "1" to make relay duty cycle of 10 min. ON & 4 minutes OFF.
Select EP & Press SET to exit from Programming mode.
17-16
Service Manual
XL-200
Press & Hold "Auto" key to select Auto mode. Respective channel will display temperature in scanning mode.
17.2.3. Pressure Tank Temperature Calibration 1. Switch OFF the machine. 2. Disconnect the (male) connector of the pressure tank (CN1). (Pressure tank temp. should be at room temp). 3. Check the resistance across the connector (male) Pressure tank CN1 (The Resistance should be 20Ω ± 2Ω). 4. If the resistance across CN1 is 20Ω ± 2Ω, then rotate the resistance setting screw of thermostat clockwise till it shows open resistance; again rotate resistance setting screw anticlockwise till it shows 20Ω. Stop rotating screw anticlockwise immediately. (When the resistance of the pressure tank displaying 20 Ω. (Resistance shows open after rotating thermostat screw clockwise. Resistance shows 20 Ω after rotating thermostat screw antilock wise). 5. Switch ON the M/C and measure the voltage across connector Pressure tank CN1 (female) which is AC voltage. (It should 40 VAC (+/- 3 VAC)). 6. Connect pressure tank connector and observe that pressure increasing to till it reaches 1.0 bar on pressure gauge. 7. Run the Application software & go to SERVICE CHECK > select ARM > INITIALIZE > select ARM UP > Execute. (Position of ARM should be in up position in trough). 8. SELECT > SYRINGE > ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE > ON (Water should continuously flow through ARM probe into trough).
17-17
Service Manual
XL-200
Keep the sensor of Temperature Indicator between probe and trough such that water should flow over the sensor. 9. Record the actual temperature of water at probe; it should be (39 +/-2°C). Observe the reading for 1 hour. NOTE: To increase the temp., rotate the setting screw of Thermostat anticlockwise slightly and to decrease the temperature rotate the setting screw of Thermostat clockwise slightly. 10. After setting the temperature within specified range now switch off the water flow from probe SYRINGE > ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE > OFF. 11. Remove the temperature sensor from the trough and switch OFF the machine & Temp. Indicator. 12. Seal the setting screw of thermostat by 3 drops of Loctite 222.
17.3. Opto Status To enter the service mode press Service Check on the main screen. Only authorized technical service personnel should operate the service screen.
17-18
Service Manual
XL-200
17.3.2. Sample Arm Serial Number
Action
Observation
1
In Multi-XL software go to Select < INITIALIZE>.
LED on SN1, SN2, SN3 & SN4 opto PCB should ON.
2
Note: - If LED on opto PCB SN1, SN2, SN3 & SN4 is OFF. Make them ON by adjusting opto mounting bracket & interrupter.
3
Select < EXECUTE>.
LED on SN1 Opto PCB goes OFF.
4
SELECT < INITIALIZE >< ARM UP >
LED on SN3 & SN4 Opto PCB turns ON & LED on opto PCB SN1& SN2 goes OFF.
5
Select < ARM UP> < ARM TROUGH TO SAMPLE INNER >
LED on SN3 & SN4 Opto PCB turns ON & LED on opto PCB SN1& SN2 goes OFF.
6
Select .
LED on SN3 & SN4 Opto PCB turns ON & LED on opto PCB
17-19
SN1& SN2 goes OFF.
Service Manual
XL-200
7
LED on SN1, SN2 & SN3 Opto PCB goes OFF & SN4 is ON.
8
LED on SN1, SN2 & SN3 Opto PCB goes OFF & SN4 is ON.
9
LED on SN1, SN2 & SN3 Opto PCB goes OFF & SN4 is ON
10
< ARM TROUGH TO REAGENT INNER>
LED on SN1, SN2 & SN3 Opto PCB goes OFF & SN4 is ON
11
< ARM UP >
LED on SN1, SN2 & SN3 Opto PCB goes OFF & SN4 is ON
12
< EXECUTE >
LED on SN2, SN3 Opto PCB goes OFF & SN1, SN4 is ON
13
LED on SN1, SN2 & SN3 Opto PCB goes OFF & SN4 is ON
NOTE: Default Arm calibration will restore factory settings.
NOTE: Do not connect or disconnect the motor connector’s in power ON condition. It will damage the driver IC of that section.
17-20
Service Manual
XL-200
17.3.3. Syringe Pump Dilutor Serial Number
Action
Observation
1
In MultiXL software go to SERVICE CHECK > Select SYRINGE > INITIALIZE.
Syringe should initialize.
2
Select
Syringe plunger should goes down.
3
Select
Syringe plunger goes up
4
Select Click ON in the software & check water flow from syringe valve O/P.
Water comes out from the O/P side of syringe valve.
5
Select
Water stops coming out from the O/P side of syringe valve.
NOTE: Do not connect or disconnect the motor connector’s in power ON condition. It will damage the driver IC of that section.
17.3.4. CRU Serial Number
Action
Observation
1
In Multi-XL software go to SERVICE CHECK > CRU > INITIALIZE
LED on SN1 Opto PCB goes OFF & SN2 becomes ON.
2
Select < DOWN>
LED on SN1 Opto PCB becomes ON & SN2 becomes OFF.
3
Select
LED on SN1 Opto PCB becomes OFF & SN2 becomes ON.
NOTE: Do not connect or disconnect the motor connector’s in power ON condition. It will damage the driver IC of that section.
17.3.5. Stirrer Serial Number
Action
Observation
1
Go to SERVICE CHECK > STIRRER
LED on SN1, SN2, SN3 Optos are ON
2
Select < INITIALIZE>
LED on SN1 gets OFF and SN2 & SN3 Optos gets ON
3
Select
LED on SN2 & SN3 Opto PCBs goes OFF.
4
Select
LED on SN1 gets ON
5
Select
LED on SN1 gets OFF
6
Select< ROTATE TO TROUGH>
LED on SN2 & SN3 Opto PCBs gets
17-21
Service Manual
XL-200 ON.
7
Select ON
Stirrer motors are switched ON.
8
Select OFF
Stirrer motors are switched OFF.
NOTE: Do not connect or disconnect the motor connector’s in power ON condition. It will damage the driver IC of that section.
17.3.6. Sample Tray Serial Number
Procedure
1
Go to SERVICE CHECK menu on MULTIXL
2
Initialize the ASP TRAY
3
HOME OPTO should be OFF
4
BASE OPTO should be ON
5
If BASE OPTO is OFF on initialize, do the alignment of BASE OPTO till it becomes ON and repeat step 2 to 5.
6
Start giving pulse command to ASP Tray
7
On 7th pulse the BASE OPTO should be OFF
8
If BASE OPTO not getting OFF on 7th pulse do the alignment of BASE OPTO and repeat step 2 to 7.
BASE OPTO=SN1; HOME OPTO= SN2 NOTE: Do not connect or disconnect the motor connector’s in power ON condition. It will damage the driver IC of that section.
17.3.7. Reagent Tray
17-22
Service Manual
XL-200
Serial Number
Procedure
1
Go to Service check menu on MULTIXL.
2
Initialize the RGT TRAY.
3
HOME OPTO should be OFF.
4
BASE OPTO should be ON (It should be at 1 INNER Position as in above figure).
5
If BASE OPTO is OFF on initialize, do the alignment of BASE OPTO till it becomes ON and repeat step 2 to 5.
6
Start giving pulse command to RGT Tray
7
On 19th or 20th pulse the BASE OPTO should be OFF
8
If BASE OPTO not getting OFF on 19th or 20th pulse do the alignment of BASE OPTO and repeat step 2 to 7.
9
After setting the BASE OPTO at 19th or 20th pulse Initialize the TRAY
10
Move the RGT Tray to 1 Outer position
11
Start giving pulse command to RGT Tray
12
Check whether the Base OPTO is getting OFF after 16 to 21 pulses
13
a) If the BASE opto is getting OFF within 16 to 21 pulses initialize the TRAY, b) If the BASE opto is not getting OFF within 16 to 21 pulses then align the BASE OPTO, initialize the TRAY and repeat steps 6 to 12
14
Move the RGT Tray to 2 Outer position
15
Start giving pulse command to RGT Tray
16
Check whether the Base OPTO is getting OFF after 16 to 21 pulses
17
a) If the BASE opto is getting OFF within 16 to 21 pulses initialize the TRAY, b) If the BASE opto is not getting OFF within 16 to 21 pulses then align the BASE OPTO, initialize the TRAY and repeat steps 6 to 17
NOTE: Do not connect or disconnect the motor connector’s in power ON condition. It will damage the driver IC of that section.
17.3.8. Reaction Tray (RCT) Serial Number
Procedure
1
Go to Service check menu on MULTIXL
2
Initialize the RCT TRAY
3
HOME OPTO should be OFF
4
BASE OPTO should be ON
5
If BASE OPTO is OFF on initialize, do the alignment of BASE OPTO till it becomes ON and repeat step 2 to 5.
6
Start giving pulse command to RCT Tray
7
On 8th pulse the BASE OPTO should be OFF
8
If BASE OPTO not getting OFF on 8th pulse do the alignment of BASE OPTO and repeat step 2 to 7.
17-23
Service Manual
XL-200
BASE OPTO=SN1 ; HOME OPTO= SN2 NOTE: Do not connect or disconnect the motor connector’s in power ON condition. It will damage the driver IC of that section.
17.3.9. PC Communication This command will check the communication between PC & Analyzer. Select the Serial port for communication - port 1, 2 , 3, 4, virtual comport & click on If communication is OK, then CPU will display “communication OK.” If communication is not OK, then CPU displays “Instrument not responding”. If this happens then check the continuity of communication path, its wire or check whether RCT has been initialized or not.
17.4. Adjustment and Verification Procedure 17.4.1. Pressure Tank Pressure Adjustment Procedure Action
Observation and Result
To adjust the pressure, locate the pressure regulator, located just above the pressure tank, with the help of a spanner, unlock the locking nut with the help of an Allen key, rotate and adjust the pressure regulator.
Pressure gauge should be between 1.0 and 1.1 bar.
Go to the Service Check screen, and select Arm > Initialize.
Observe the steady flow of water from the Arm trough, Stirrer trough, and Probe.
Click on Arm up and Execute. Click on the ARM TROUGH VALVE button and Switch ON the CKD valves. Similarly click on ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE, STIRRER TROUGH VALVE one after the other Switch ON all the switches together and keep the hydraulic assembly ON for some time, till the entire water line is primed and free of trapped air bubbles.
17-24
Verify that the water flow should be smooth and there should be no leakages and that the pressure gauge does not fluctuate.
Service Manual
XL-200
17.4.2. Syringe Valve Verification Procedure Action
Observation and Result
Check the pressure on the pressure sensor.
Pressure sensor should be shown between 1.0 and 1.1 bar.
Go to the SERVICE CHECK>, click on the ARM button. Click on ARM UP & EXECUTE respectively.
Arm probe will be in up position at trough.
Switch ON the ARM TROUGH VALVE. Similarly click on ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE and STIRRER TROUGH VALVE one after the other.
Observe a small fountain of water in trough for probe & stirrer.
Switch ON all the ARM TROUGH VALVE and ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE together and keep the hydraulic assembly ON for some time, till the entire water line is primed and free of trapped air bubbles.
Verify that the water flow is smooth and there should be no leakages and that the pressure sensor does not fluctuate.
During ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE, observe the flow of water thru probe as a smooth laminar flow (Uninterrupted straight jet).
17.4.3. Laundry Flow Adjustment Procedure 17.4.3.1. Detergent or Cleaning Solution Flow Adjustment Procedure Action
Observations
Go to Maintenance from the main screen, go to Wash frame, select CUVETTE RINSE, and then press START.
Monitor the flow of cleaning solution from the cleaning solution can, through the DET pump and the tube to the first laundry (Detergent Wash) probe, and into the first cuvette of washing cycle,. To regulate the detergent flow, remove the fixed rear panel and locate the black colored, flow regulator on the top of the detergent pump, Adjust it in order to enable the detergent flow into the first cuvette, to fill up to 3/4 of the total volume of the cuvette. Verify that there is no spillage of detergent from any of the cuvettes. Observe this carefully for multiple rinse cycles.
17.4.3.2. De-ionized Water Flow Verification Procedure Action
Observations
DEIONISED WATER FLOW VERIFICATION PROCEDURE Go to Maintenance from the main screen, go to Wash frame, select CUVETTE RINSE, and then press START.
Monitor the flow of deionized water from the DI water can, to the pump, to the pressure vessel, and trough the tubing’s into the cuvettes, under laundry probes 2, 3, 4 & 5; also verify a proper drain from all the cuvette. To regulate the deionized water flow open the top cover on right side near the reagent tray, locate the
17-25
Service Manual
XL-200 flow regulator (pinch valve), this regulator is connected in line with the deionized water tubing to the laundry system. Adjust it, so that at the time of rinsing, the deionized water flow into the second, third, fourth and fifth cuvette, located under the second, third, fourth and fifth laundry probe fills to 3/4 of the total volume of the cuvette. Verify that there is no spillage of deionized water from any of the cuvettes. Observe this carefully for multiple rinse cycles.
17.4.4. Arm Probe Internal Cleaning Flow Verification No adjustments can be made to control the flow of internal cleaning, only a flow verification can be made as follows: Action
Observations
Check the pressure on the pressure gauge
Pressure should be between 1.0 and 1.1 bar.
Go to the SERVICE CHECK >, click on the ARM button. Click on ARM UP & EXECUTE respectively.
Arm probe will be in up position at trough.
Switch ON the ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE.
During ‘ON’ ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE, observe the flow of water through probe as a smooth laminar flow (Uninterrupted straight jet).
Switch ON all the ARM TROUGH VALVE & ARM PROBE CLEAN VALVE together and keep the hydraulic assembly ON.
Verify that the water flow is smooth and there should be no leakages and that the pressure gauge does not fluctuate.
NOTE: Verify that all the valves turned off before exit from service check menu to avoid any spillage of DI water.
17.4.5. Service Check Screen To enter the service mode press Service Check on the main screen. Only authorized technical service personnel should operate the Service Check screen.
17-26
Service Manual
XL-200
Figure 17-1. Service check screen
NOTE: The options in the Service Check are not accessible if any maintenance operation is running through the maintenance screen. In this case, the status message highlighted will be displayed in yellow color on the Current State field as shown below.
Arm/Stirrer
This option is used for checking the alignment of the ARM Probe or Stirrer Assembly. Upon selecting the Arm or Stirrer Option, the service personnel can check the alignment of the respective assembly in trough, in sample
17-27
Service Manual
XL-200
tray (outer, middle and inner positions), in reagent tray (outer positions and inner positions), in cuvette & in dilution cuvette. The operator can check stirrer motor rotation speed at three different options as shown in picture below:
Initialize: This will initialize the arm assembly as per the available options selected from the list. Dummy Run: On clicking this button, user can define the Sample, Diluent and reagent position. After defining the respective positions, on clicking START button, Dummy run is initiated. On clicking STOP button, Dummy run can be stopped when required. Execute: This will move the respective assembly in the selected path. This is used to check the motion of an arm assembly in a particular path. Also for checking the Opto conditions. DCF: This option is used to set the dilution calibration factor. The dilution factor should be entered in the range 0.75 to 1.25. This feature is used in case if recovery of any of the dilution run is improper. Use the following procedure to set the dilution factor: a. Manually calculate the Dilution Calibration Factor (DCF) using 5x dilution as shown below: DCF = (Expected mean of 5x) / (Observed mean of 5x) b. Click on the DCF button and enter the resultant DCF value in DCF text box and click on SAVE.
This will save the value in the system. This factor will be transferred to analyzer and will be stored in analyzer memory.
17-28
Service Manual
XL-200
c. On every power on, this factor will be transferred to MultiXL. d. MultiXL will multiply the results of dilution, any dilution for 2x to 150x, by this factor and then result is declared. NOTE: In case of restore backup, it is recommended to restart the analyzer in order to get correct calibration values including DCF. Sample Tray
Initialize: This option is used to initialize the Sample Tray. (Position # 1) Pulse: A PULSE button is also given for moving the sample tray step by step (one pulse gives micro-step change between 2 positions) Rotate to Position: This option is used for rotating the sample tray to “X” position depending on the position selected by the service personnel. To move to next position Sample Tray needs to be initialized. Barcode Scan: This option is used to perform Sample Barcode Scan. All the Barcode(s) Read is displayed on the screen (No cross check or verification of Duplication done). Display remains until user performs some other operation. To view the same Barcode(s) again user has to click on the button with Barcode label (This option is available until user remains on the Service Check Screen). ASP Barcode Scanner Beam ON/OFF: This option is used to Turn ON or OFF the ASP Barcode Scanner Beam. On reading the Barcode the Beam turns OFF automatically.
Reagent Tray
Initialize: This option is used to initialize the Reagent Tray. (Position # 1) Pulse: A PULSE button is given for moving the reagent tray step by step (between 2 positions). Rotate to Position: This option is used for used for rotating the reagent tray to “X” position depending on the position selected by the service personnel. (Positions are labeled as “01-I”, “01-O” represents position One-Inner, OneOuter respectively). Barcode Scan: This option is used to perform Reagent Barcode Scan. All the Barcode(s) Read are displayed on the screen (No cross check or verification of Duplication / Checksum / Number of Digits / Invalid Reagent Code / Invalid Bottle Type are done). Display remains until user performs
17-29
Service Manual
XL-200
some other operation. To view the same Barcode(s) again user has to click on the button with Barcode label (This option is available until user remains on the Service Check Screen). RGT Barcode Scanner Beam ON/OFF: This option is used to Turn ON or OFF the RGT Barcode Scanner Beam. On reading the Barcode the Beam turns OFF automatically. RCT Tray
Initialize: This option is used to initialize RCT Tray to initial position. (Cuvette Number 39 in path of Light Beam). Pulse: This option is given for moving the reaction tray in micro steps (between 2 cuvettes) to check for the opto-coupler alignment. Rotate To: This option is used for rotating the reaction tray to “X” position.
CRU Unit
This function allows the service personnel to check the CRU Functionality. A CRU RUN CHECK button. Initialize: This option initializes the CRU Assembly to home position (UP). Run Check: This option is given to check the functionality of the aspiration and suction probes of the CRU in this mode. DOWN: This option brings CRU Down in Cuvette. NOTE: Make sure the RCT Cuvettes are aligned before executing this command. Following options are available after CRU is Down in Cuvette:
17-30
Service Manual
XL-200
CRU BIOHAZARD SUCT’N PUMP ON / OFF: This option turns the BioHazard Suction Pump ON or OFF. CRU WATER DISPENSE ON / OFF: This option turns the Water Dispense Valve ON / OFF. NOTE: To try this option first brings CRU Down in Cuvette and keep Bio-Hazard Suction Pumps ON to avoid any overflow and keep Overflow Suction Valve OFF. CRU DETERGENT DISP. PUMP ON / OFF: This option is used to turns ON / OFF the Detergent Dispense Pump ON or OFF. NOTE: To try this option first brings CRU Down in Cuvette and keep Bio-Hazard Suction Pumps ON to avoid any overflow and keep Overflow Suction Valve OFF. CRU OVERFLOW SUCT’N VALVE: This option turns Overflow Suction Valve ON or OFF. NOTE: To try this option CRU Water Dispense and Detergent Dispense should be OFF.
Syringe
Initialize: This option initializes the SYRINGE Assembly to home position. Aspirate: The service personnel can check the ASPIRATE steps by entering the desired volume in the field provided. The maximum volume that can be entered for ASPIRATION movement is 375 µl. Dispense: The service personnel can check the DISPENSE steps by entering the desired volume in the field provided. The maximum volume that can be entered for DISPENSE movement is 375 µl. Valve and Pump
17-31
Service Manual
XL-200
This option is used for checking the Valve operations for ARM Trough, ARM PROBE and Stirrer Trough. ARM Trough Valve: Turns ON or OFF the ARM Trough Valve. ARM Probe Clean Valve: Turns ON or OFF the ARM Probe Clean Valve. STIRRER Trough Valve: Turns ON or OFF the Trough Valve of Stirrer. RCT/RGT TEMP: This option is used for displaying the RCT & RGT temperature. The RCT Temperature should be within 37 +/-0.2 °C & the RGT temperature within 8-12 °C.
READ: This button starts reading operation and given Temperature Display till Stopped. STOP: STOP button should be clicked before moving out of next screen. Sensor Status: Status of all three temperature sensors are indicated as follows: P - Present and within limits (36.8 ~ 37.2 °C) O - Out of Range (Less than 36.8 °C or Greater than 37.2 °C) A - Absent (This error will occur when there is no communication between the sensors and Micro blaze) L - Loose (This error will occur if sensors are not properly grounded.) Communication
This option is used for checking the communication between PC and the analyzer. The service personnel select the COM port and then click on the TEST COMMUNICATION button. Calibration
This section of Service Check Form is used to Calibrate ARM centering at various applicable positions. Pre-requisites for this operation is to bring the ARM or STIRRER to required position using the ARM/STIRRER Move options.
17-32
Service Manual
XL-200
Clock Wise: Set direction of rotation for ARM / STIRRER as Clockwise. Anti-Clock Wise: Set direction of rotation for ARM / STIRRER as Anticlockwise. +++
: This button allows Course step movement of ARM / STIRRER.
+
: This button allows FINE step movement of ARM / STIRRER.
Accept: Saves the Course / FINE adjusted value of ARM / STIRRER in to local memory. Values are not saved in Analyzer until “Save Calib.” Button is clicked. Cancel: Cancels the locally Accepted Value(s) of Course / FINE adjustment(s) of ARM / STIRRER. Default: Cancels and reloads the default position of ARM / STIRRER at respective position of calibration. Save Calib: This option is mandatory after calibrating the ARM / STIRRER. The locally Accepted values are Saved in the Analyzer Non-volatile memory and are used by Analyzer henceforth. Calibration Menu Button
The following options are displayed when this button is clicked:
Read Default Calibration: This option will transfer the new default data (if any) from the ESW (CPU) to PC. Read Current Calibration: This option will transfer the current data from the analyzer (i.e. EEPROM of CPU) to PC. Load Default Calibration: This option is to load the default values from the PC to analyzer (i.e. EEPROM of CPU). Show Current Calibration: This option will displays the current calibration values in the analyzer. NOTE: Before doing calibration Read Default and Current Calibration Values, as these values are required to check limits of calibration steps at respective position of ARM / STIRRER.
17-33
Service Manual
XL-200
Current Calib Backup: This option will take the backup of current calibration which is saved in the EEPROM to PC. Restore Current Calib Backup: This option will load the backup file onto the EEPROM of the CPU. Misc Commands: This option helps to view Version Numbers for MultiXL Software and Embedded Software Versions (Analyzer, Micro Blaze, FPGA, PDC and RCT Heater). Click on this button, and then select “Software Version”.
While exiting Service Check screen, analyzer will be initialized. During Initialization; Status Monitor, Maintenance and Service Check screen will show the following window with “Please Wait Analyzer is initializing” message.
Figure 17-2. Service check initialization screen
17-34
Service Manual
XL-200
17.4.6. Photometer Verification Procedure Clicking on Maintenance screen brings you to the following screen.
This screen is useful to view the photometer gains at 8 wavelengths. 1. Go to the Maintenance screen. 2. Select on AUTO SPAN and click on START from the auto span screen. 3. Gain values displayed for all wavelengths should be between 50 and 900. If gain value is not in range, check for the beam alignment and the lamp voltage.
17.4.7. Procedure to Remove Air Bubbles from Syringe
Bubble present in syringe
17-35
Service Manual
XL-200
Kit for removal of bubbles
1. Fill the syringe supplied in kit with saline.
NOTE: Before performing this task, use tissue papers to cover assemblies located bellow syringe to avoid spillage of water. 2. Remove front connector (Inlet water port) of syringe.
17-36
Service Manual
XL-200
3. Connect the connector of syringe filed with saline to the open port of syringe from analyzer.
4. Inject saline water in the syringe with gentle pressure and check whether the air bubble is being ejected out of syringe.
5. Aspirate water from syringe from analyzer and check for existence of air bubble in syringe. 6. Repeat the injection & aspiration steps without removing the external syringe port connection, until the air bubble is ejected out from syringe.
17-37
Service Manual
XL-200
7. To eliminate very tiny bubbles, gently tap the syringe head while saline injection is in process, so that the bubbles are released 8. Once the bubbles are removed then, follow the bellow process to reconnect the front port inlet connector in place of external syringe connector. 9. Dismantle top connector of syringe.
10. Ensure that the thumb is placed on outlet port before dismantling external syringe kit connector till the regular syringe front inlet connector is refitted back to its position. This is required in order to avoid air getting trapped in syringe
17-38
Service Manual
XL-200
11. Dismantle external syringe connector.
12. Reconnect front port connector.
13. Reconnect the outlet connector back
17-39
Service Manual
XL-200
14. Start the internal cleaning valve of probe & observe the clear view of syringe head.
17.5. Temperature Verification Procedure 17.5.1. Reagent Temperature Verification Procedure Fill a Reagent bottle, place it on the reagent tray, cover the reagent tray with the reagent tray cover, wait for about an hour, till the temperature has stabilized, Insert a sensitive thermal measuring device, into the reagent bottle and measure the temperature, Go to the SERVICE CHECK menu and click on the TEMPERATURE button, and verify the temperature of the reagent tray, displayed on the screen, the temperature displayed should be approximately 12 to 15 °C lower than the ambient room temperature. The measured temperature and the displayed temperatures should be approximately matched.
17-40
Service Manual
XL-200
17.5.2. Reaction Temperature Verification Procedure After having reached thermal stability (after waiting 5 minutes from Analyzer startup), introduce a Temperature sensor e.g. thermistor into a cuvette no 34 filled with 180μl of cold (7 °C) DI water, make sure that the measuring device is completely inserted into the liquid wait for about 5 minutes and note down the reading, it should be 37 °C +/- 0.2 °C. Go to the SERVICE CHECK menu and click on the TEMPERATURE button, and verify the temperature of the Reaction tray, displayed on the screen, the temperature displayed should match the value read using thermistor.
17.6. Analytical Check Procedure 17.6.1. Absorbance Test Procedure (optional) A solution of Potassium Dichromate is used to test the precision of the reagent and sample pipetting.
17.6.2. Preparation of Solution A Make up an 8.826 g/l solution of Potassium Dichromate as follows. 1. Dilute 0.8826 grams of Potassium Dichromate in 100 ml of de-ionized water. 2. This solution will be used as a sample for the sample precision test.
17.6.3. Preparation of Solution B Make up a 1 in 60 dilution of Solution A as follows: 1. Add 59 ml of de-ionized water to 1 ml of Solution A, to make 60 ml of Solution B. 2. Decant this into a reagent bottle for use in the reagent precision test.
17.6.4. Method 17.6.4.1. Sample Absorbance Test 1. Use Solution A as a sample with de-ionized water as reagent. 2. A factor of 1000 is used.
17.6.4.2. Reagent Absorbance Test 1. Use Solution B as a Reagent and de-ionized water as sample. 2. A factor of 1000 is used. Twenty replicates for each test should be used to facilitate meaningful and statistical analysis of the results.
17-41
Service Manual
XL-200
3. A coefficient of variation of < 1% for the reagent test and < 0.5% for the sample test should be regarded as requirement and should be met.
17.6.4.3. Chemistry Run Perform Patient batch run of up to 12 chemistries with the 4 FQC parameters – GLU, ALT, CHO and TP. Check the CV %, as per FQC report.
17-42
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
17-43
Service Manual
XL-200
18. Miscellaneous This chapter deals with additional information as follows.
18.1. Fuse Ratings Serial Number
Fuses
Function
Fuse Blown Indicator
Mains switch Fuse – 5A Slow Blow (220V)
Mains incoming
-------
Mains switch Fuse –10A Slow Blow (110V)
Noise filter.
-------
1
F1 – 500mA Slow Blow (9VAC)
Power supply PCB J1
15V to 30V
2
F2 – 500mA Slow Blow (9VAC)
Power supply PCB J1
15V to 30V
3
F3 – 500mA Slow Blow (9VAC)
Power supply PCB J7
15V to 30V
4
F4 – 500mA Slow Blow (9VAC)
Power supply PCB J7
15V to 30V
5
F5 – 500mA Slow Blow (9VAC)
Power supply PCB J4
15V to 30V
6
F6 – 500mA Slow Blow (9VAC)
Power supply PCB J3
15V to 30V
7
F7 – 2.5A Slow Blow (40VAC)
P. Tank Heater
15V to 30V
8
F8 – 2A Slow Blow (100VAC)
Vacuum pump
110V to 250V
9
F9 – 1A Slow Blow (230VAC)
KNF PUMP
110V to 250V
10
F10 – 3.15 A Slow Blow (230 V AC)
TX primary.
110V to 250V
11
F1 – 1A Slow Blow 5mm X 20mm
Interface PCB Assy – 100V AC Supply for Valves.
12
F2 – 5A Fast Blow 5mm X 20mm
Interface PCB assy – 24V DC
13
F3 – 2A Fast Blow 5mm X 20mm
Interface PCB Assy – 5V DC
18-1
Service Manual
XL-200
18.2. Transformer, SMPS Details Serial Number
Parameter
INPUT AC TYPE 220VAC/50Hz Required
110VAC/60Hz Actual
Required
1
Mains input AC Supply 220 ± 5VAC (Switch ON rear Switch)
110 ± 2.5VAC
2
RGT temperature indicator / controller
220 ± 5VAC
220 ± 5VAC
3
RGT duct fan supply.
220 ± 5VAC
220 ± 5VAC
4
12V/20A SMPS – Peltier Assy 12V/20A SMPS Input
220 ± 5VAC
110 ± 2.5VAC
12V/20A SMPS Output
12 ± 0.3VDC
12 ± 0.3VDC
12 ± 0.1VDC
12 ± 0.1VDC
Pin no.2 & 5(Black , Red) 12 ± 0.1VDC
12 ± 0.1VDC
Pin no.3 & 6 (Black , Red)
12 ± 0.1VDC
12 ± 0.1VDC
RGT Peltier Fan 1 Pin 1&2 ( Blue, Red)
12 ± 0.1VDC
12 ± 0.1VDC
RGT Peltier Fan 2 Pin 1&2 ( Blue, Red)
12 ± 0.1VDC
12 ± 0.1VDC
RGT Peltier Supply. ( 6 pin connector) Pin no.1 & 4 (Black , Red)
RGT Peltier fan supply.
5
24V/1.1A SMPS (ISE) 24V/1.1A SMPS Input
220 ± 5VAC
110 ± 2.5VAC
24V/1.1A SMPS Output
24 ± 0.3VDC
24 ± 0.3VDC
Switch ON Front Switch 6
Terminal Block (L & N) 220 ± 5VAC
110 ± 2.5VAC
7
TX Primary ( TX CN1)
220 ± 5VAC
110 ± 2.5VAC
Tx CN2 pin no.1 & 2 ( White , Black )
9 ± 1VAC
9 ± 1VAC
Tx CN2 pin no.2 & 3 (Black , white )
9 ± 1VAC
9 ± 1VAC
Tx CN2 pin no 4 &5 ( Orange , Yellow)
9 ± 1VAC
9 ± 1VAC
Tx CN2 pin no.5 & 6 (Yellow , Orange)
9 ± 1VAC
9 ± 1VAC
Tx CN2 pin no.7 & 8 ( Pink , Pink )
9 ± 1VAC
9 ± 1VAC
TX Secondary
18-2
Actual
Service Manual
8
9
10
XL-200 Tx CN2 pin no.9 & 10 ( L. Blue, L. Blue)
9 ± 1VAC
9 ± 1VAC
Tx CN3 pin no 1& 2 ( Black , Black)
40 ± 3VAC
40 ± 3VAC
Tx CN3 pin no 3& 4 ( Red, Red)
100± 5VAC
220± 5VAC
Tx CN4 pin no. 1&2 (Gray, Gray)
100± 5VAC
Tx CN5 pin no. 1&2 (L.Brown,L.Brown)
9 ± 1VAC
9 ± 1VAC
Ventilation fan PCB / section(I/P)
9 ± 1VAC
9 ± 1VAC
Ventilation fan PCB / section (O/P)
12±0.2VDC
12±0.2VDC
12V/5A SMPS Input
220 ± 5VAC
110 ± 2.5VAC
12V/5A SMPS Output
12 ± 0.05VDC
12 ± 0.05VDC
Voltage across Lamp terminal
11.8 ± 0.05VDC
11.8 ± 0.05VDC
220 ± 5VAC
110 ± 2.5VAC
12V/5A SMPS – Lamp Supply
24V/6.3A SMPSStepper Motor 24V/6.3A SMPS Input
24V/6.3A SMPS Output 24 ± 0.5VDC 11
24± 0.5VDC
5V/5A SMPS – Logic Supply 5V/5A SMPS Input
220 ± 5VAC
110 ± 2.5VAC
5V/5A SMPS Output
5 ± 0.05VDC
5± 0.05VDC
18-3
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
18-4
Service Manual
XL-200
19. Accessories, Spares, and Consumable List 19.1. Spares Parts List Serial Number
Item Code
System Description
ACCESSORIES AND CONSUMABLES 1
100592
ADAPTOR REAGENT 5 ML (set of 50 )
2
102090
HOLDER FOR 5 ML REAGENT ADAPTOR OUTER
3
182581
REAGENT BOTTLE (20 ML) (set of 25)
4
182584
REAGENT BOTTLE (50 ML) (set of 25)
5
102932
SAMPLE CUP (set of 450)
100634
TUBE ADAPTER TEST TUBE FOR MOULDED SAMPLE HOLDING PLATE (set of 50)
7
107613
FILTER 10 MICRON 125mm (set of 4 ) NEW
8
102851
CUVETTE DRIER
182220
PHOTOMETER LAMP ASSY FOR XL
10
100896
STIRRER TYPE-1 (TEFLON BLACK COATING)
11
100263
CUVETTE
12
100660
PVC Boat support(qty 25)
13
105474
SET LAUNDRY ASPIRATION TUBING - 2R
14
105475
SET LAUNDRY DISPENSING TUBING - 2R
15
104604
FUSE SET
16
201210
KIT ANNUAL MAINTENANCE - 2R
17
112711
BI-ANNUAL SPARES KIT_XL-200
18
104602
TOTAL TUBING SET - 2R
19
104603
CONNECTOR SET - 2R
6
9
SPARE PARTS ASP TRAY 20
104663
ASSEMBLY ASP BASE - 2R
21
104686
ASSEMBLY MOTOR ASP - 2R
22
100845
BELT TIMING 351-3M-9
23
104189
RCT,ASP,RGT OPTO ASSY - 2R
24
104263
ASP CONTAINER - 2R
25
105141
ASP OUTER RIM - 2R
26
103800
ASSEMBLY SAMPLE TRAY MOUNT - 2R
27
104664
ASSEMBLY STANDARD SAMPLE TRAY - 2R
19-1
Service Manual 28
XL-200 102103
INTERRUPTER HOME POSITION - 2R
REAGENT TRAY 29
104665
ASSEMBLY RGT BASE (WITH PROXIMITY SENSOR) - 2X
30
104763
ASSEMBLY RGT BASE (WITH MAGNETIC SENSOR) - 2X
31
103801
ASSEMBLY REAGENT TRAY CONTAINER - 2R
32
104666
ASSEMBLY RGT MOTOR -2R
33
100849
BELT TIMING 504-3M-9
34
102099
INTTERUPTER OPTO FOR HOME POSITION - 2R
35
104669
REAGENT COOLING ASSY - 2R
36
104667
REAGENT COVER ASSY. (WITH PROXIMITY SENSOR) - 2X
37
104764
REAGENT COVER ASSY. (WITH MAGNETIC SENSOR) - 2X
38
104668
ASSEMBLY RGT TRAY - 2X
39
104264
RGT TRAY MOUNT - 2X
40
105142
RGT OUTER RIM - 2R
41
103798
ASSEMBLY RGT GLASS WINDOW - 2R
BARCODE 42
105237
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY OF NEC BARCODE READER EAS6015 R2
43
105347
ASSEMBLY ELECTRICAL BCL8 BARCODE READER - EAS6024
44
105689
ASSEMBLY MICROSCAN BARCODE READER 2R_S
45
106864
CANMAX BARCODE FOR ASP (NEW)
46
106865
CANMAX BARCODE FOR RGT (NEW)
47
104050
CUVETTE RING SET ASSY. (WITHOUT CUVETTES) - 2R
48
104612
ASSEMBLY BASE FOR RCT - 2R
49
104687
ASSEMBLY MOTOR FOR RCT - 2R
50
104670
RCT SLIPRING ELECTRICAL ASSY - 2R
51
104191
RCT WATER JACKET ASSY - 2R
52
104192
RCT CUVETTE NUMBERING PLATE ASSY - 2R
53
104265
CLAMP FOR CUVETTE - 2R
54
105134
RCT COVER - 2X
55
104614
ASSEMBLY ARM - 2X
56
104688
ASSEMBLY MOTOR ARM ROTATION - 2R
57
104689
ASSEMBLY MOTOR ARM UP/DN - 2R
58
107086
ASSEMBLY PROBE ARM NEW (TUBE ON TUBE CONTRUCTION) FOR LLS ELS62026R1_S _2
59
107087
ASSEMBLY PROBE ARM (TUBE ON TUBE CONTRUCTION) for LLS ELS62026R0_S _2
60
107155
KIT for Probe and LLS PCB
RCT
ARM
19-2
Service Manual
XL-200
61
104195
ARM BASE PROBE HOLDER ASSY. - 2R
62
104496
ASSEMBLY OF PROBE HOUSING - 2R
63
104257
PLATE FOR TUBE SUPPORT
64
100693
PLATE FOR CABLE SUPPORT
65
102270
PULLEY ASSEMBLY ARM IDLER
66
104499
ASSEMBLY PROBE ARM OPTO - 2R
67
100840
BELT TIMING ; B 110 MXL 8.0 (ROTATIONAL)
68
100850
BELT TIMING 312-3M-9 (VERTICAL)
69
104186
ASSY. ARM COVER - 2X
70
112462
TROUGH_ARM WITH FILTER & NOZZLE ASSY. FOR XL-200_S
71
104671
ASSEMBLY STIRRER - 2X
72
104266
STIRRER MOUNTING PLATE - 2X
73
104690
ASSEMBLY ROTATION MOTOR -2R
74
104691
ASSEMBLY SUB UP - DN MOTOR - 2R
75
104497
ASSEMBLY OF STIRRER TROUGH - 2R
76
104672
ASSEMBLY SHAFT IDLER - 2X
77
104500
ASSEMBLY STIRRER OPTO - 2R
78
104187
ASSY. STIRRER COVER - 2X
79
100847
BELT TIMING 201-3M-9 (VERTICAL)
80
100844
BELT TIMING 74XL037 (ROTATIONAL)
81
104674
CUVETTE RINSING LAUNDRY UNIT - 2R
82
104501
CUVETTE RINSING UNIT OPTO ASSY - 2R
83
104675
ASSY. FOR CRU DETERGENT PROBE - 2R
84
104676
ASSY. FOR CRU WASH PROBE - 2R
85
104621
ASSY. FOR SUCTION PROBE - 2R
86
104622
ASSY. FOR DRIER PROBE - 2R
87
104790
CUVETTE RINSING LAUNDRY UNIT (SINGLE PLATE) - 2R NEW
88
104791
ASSY. FOR CRU DETERGENT PROBE (SINGLE PLATE) - 2R NEW
89
104792
ASSY. FOR CRU WASH PROBE (SINGLE PLATE) - 2R NEW
90
104793
ASSY. FOR SUCTION PROBE (SINGLE PLATE) - 2R NEW
91
104794
ASSY. FOR DRIER PROBE (SINGLE PLATE) - 2R NEW
92
105691
ASSEMBLY SAPPHIRE SYRINGE 500ul_S
93
100834
PUMP SYRINGE VFP17/V17 500ul NEW SYRINGE
94
108551
KIT FOR SOLENOID VALVE (BURKERT) FOR 2R
95
108597
ASSEMBLY BURKERT VALVE_2R_S
STIRRER
CRU
SYRINGE
19-3
Service Manual
XL-200
PHOTOMETER 96
103805
ASSEMBLY PHOTOMETER - 2X
97
104677
ASSEMBLY LENS HOLDER XL-200 - 2R
98
101223
LENS DIA-9.5MM FUSED SILICA FL 22 MM
99
102127
MOUNT FOR LAMP
100
104282
MIRROR & FILTER HOLDER WITH FILTER ASSLY - 2X
101
110509
OPTICAL FILTER 340 NM
102
105573
ASSEMBLY SQUARE FILTER 405nm
103
105576
ASSEMBLY SQUARE FILTER 505nm
104
105577
ASSEMBLY SQUARE FILTER 546nm
105
105578
ASSEMBLY SQUARE FILTER 578nm
106
105579
ASSEMBLY SQUARE FILTER 600nm
107
109468
ASSEMBLY SQUARE FILTER 660nm
108
109469
ASSEMBLY SQUARE FILTER 700nm
HYDRAULICS 109
104678
ASSEMBLY PRESSURE TANK - 2R
110
104489
ASSEMBLY PRESSURE TANK - DEEP DRAWN NEW
111
104625
ASSEMBLY PUMP KNF BIG - 2R
112
104680
DAMPER ASSY
113
104888
KNF VACUUM PUMP
114
103806
ASSEMBLY SHUTOFF VALVE - 2R
115
100917
PRESSURE REGULATOR FDV30KPZ
116
100586
PINCH VALVE
117
104679
ASSEMBLY MANIFOLD FOR CRU JUNCTION - 2R
118
104258
DISPENSING MANIFOLD
119
103807
ASPIRATION MANIFOLD
120
103808
SUCTION MANIFOLD
121
104647
ASSEMBLY DEGASSER - 2R
122
103994
ASSEMBLY DEGASSER PRE-FILTER
123
100515
WATER FILTER 10 MICRONS
124
100623
GASKET SILICON FOR WATER FILTER
125
105411
ASSEMBLY CAN 20 LTR WITH LEVEL SENSOR FOR DI WATER -HARD TUBE
126
105418
ASSEMBLY CAN 20 LTR WASTE WITH LEVEL SENSOR HARD TUBE
127
105364
ASSEMBLY CAN 10 LTR WITH LEVEL SENSOR FOR BIO-
19-4
Service Manual
XL-200 HAZARDOUS WASTE -HARD TUBE
128
105414
ASSEMBLY CAN 10 LTR. CLEANING SOLN WITH LEVEL SENSOR -HARD TUBE
129
102196
SPIGOT FOR 20 LTR. WATER CAN
130
102316
TUBE SS FOR WATER FILTER
131
104646
ASSEMBLY OF SPIGOT FOR WASTE CAN - 2R
132
103809
SET OF CAN STICKERS
ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICALS 133
105708
ASSEMBLY PCB INTERFACE ELS62009R7 FOR XL-200 RETROFIT (ELS62009R3.1)_S
134
107822
ASSEMBLY PCB INTERFACE ELS62009R7_A3979SLPT FOR XL-200_S
135
109067
ASSEMBLY PCB INTERFACE ELS62009R7.1_A3979SLPT _S_2 For XL-200/EM-200
136
109068
ASSEMBLY PCB INTERFACE ELS62009R7.1 FOR XL-200 RETROFIT ( ELS62009R3.1)_S
137
104509
ASSEMBLY PCB SPARTAN-3 CPU (SPARE)
138
104510
ASSEMBLY PCB POWER SUPPLY (SPARE)
139
104511
ASSEMBLY PCB PHOTOMETER DIODE FOR XL-200 (SPARE)
140
104503
ASSEMBLY PCB PHOTOMETER SIGNAL PROCESSING (SPARE)
141
107154
ASSEMBLY PCB LLS ELS22036R2.1 WITH LED INDICATOR _S_2R
142
107156
ASSEMBLY LLS PCB ELS22036R2.1 FOR OLD PROBE _S_2R
143
105173
POS1 PCB ASSY.
144
104506
ASSEMBLY PCB LLC JUNCTION
145
105532
ASSEMBLY PCB USB CONNECTOR ELLC2003R4_S
146
101080
POWER SUPPLY SMPS 12V/18A S-240-12
147
101081
POWER SUPPLY SMPS 24V/6.3A SP-150-25 (UNIVERSAL AC INPUT)
148
100822
POWER SUPPLY SMPS 12V/5A S-60-12
149
100821
POWER SUPPLY SMPS 5V/5A S-25-5
150
181477
POWER SUPPLY SMPS 24V/1.1A S-25-24
151
105625
ASSEMBLY TRANSFORMER - 220V_S
152
105626
ASSEMBLY TRANSFORMER - 110V_S
153
103454
ASSEMBLY OF TANK HEATER & SENSOR ASSY.
154
101421
CABLE ASSEMBLY USB JUMPER USBC-AM-BM-B-B-S-2 ESS781
155
100819
POWER ENTRY MODULE WITH MAINS FILTER 6A/250VAC TYPE CD 44.1101.151(SCH.)
156
105636
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY DETERGENT PUMP_S
157
105637
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY BIOHAZARD PUMP_S
19-5
Service Manual
XL-200
158
105638
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY CKD VALVE_S
159
105333
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY OF STIRRER MOTOR (SAYAMA) ELE. ASSEMBLY. -EAS6003 R2
160
104491
ASSEMBLY ELECTRICAL DIGITAL PRESSURE SENSOR FOR XL-200
161
105646
ASSEMBLY TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER MODEL NO. SZ7510-C2 WITH SENSOR
162
105641
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY RGT PELTIERS _S
163
105642
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY RGT MINI FAN _S
164
105643
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY RGT DUCT FAN _S
165
105644
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLY VENTILLATION FAN _S
166
104502
TECHNIC ON/OFF SWITCH ELEC. ASSY.
167
106653
ASSEMBLY LEVEL SENSOR FOR 20 LTR DI WATER CAN
168
106654
ASSEMBLY LEVEL SENSOR FOR 10 LIT CLEANING SOLUTION CAN
169
106655
ASSEMBLY LEVEL SENSOR FOR 10 LTR BIO-HAZARDOUS SOLUTION CAN
170
106656
ASSEMBLY LEVEL SENSOR FOR 20 LIT WASTE CAN
171
105415
ASSEMBLY CAN 10 LTRS. FOR CLEANING SOLUTION
172
104259
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 2 CHANNEL TA-22C2 Without Sensor
173
200001
Na ELECTRODE
174
200002
K ELECTRODE
175
105547
eCl ELECTRODE
176
200004
REFERENCE ELECTRODE
177
100316
Li ELECTRODE
178
100346
SPACER ELECTRODE REF 5206
179
104984
BUBBLE DETECTOR KIT
180
103865
PLATTEN PUMP TUBING KIT
181
104762
PAD FOR ISE PACK LOCATION WITH V CLIPS - 2X
182
100317
ASSEMBLY 4 CHANNEL ISE
183
102177
GAS SPRING 12KG, STROKE 80mm EXT Length=240
184
101677
CLEANER FOR PROBE( Qty-2)
185
105392
TOOL KIT
186
105445
DOME ASSY XL-200
187
105160
FRONT PANEL - SCREEN PRINTED PRODUCT NAME "XL200".
188
100817
KNF Vaccum pump Elbow Connector(Set of 2)
189
108103
CRU MANIFOLD CONNECTOR(set of 5)
190
110145
Glass Heat Filter
ISE
OTHERS
19-6
Service Manual
XL-200
191
104808
Diba Connector Red
192
104807
Diba connector Black
PROGRAMMING TOOL 193
103553
PLATFORM CABLE USB - PB-FREE XILINX HW-USB-II-G
194
103554
USB DEBUG ADAPTER - DEBUGADPTR1-USB
19-7
Service Manual
XL-200
This Page is Intentionally Left Blank
19-8
Service Manual
XL-200
20. Appendix 20.1. TBM Image Installation for Windows Embedded 7 This section explains you the procedure of installing the TBM image (Windows Embedded 7 Operating System) into the analyzer PC. NOTE: The analyzer PC comes with preinstalled TBM image.
For any reason, if the TBM image is not installed or you want to upgrade the existing operating system (OS) into TBM image, please read the following information carefully for installing the TBM image to analyzer PC.
20.1.1. Scenario There could be two scenarios under installing the TBM image: New (Clean Installation) Upgrade/ Reinstall
20.1.1.1. New (Clean Installation) It is the first installation of TBM image on a fresh computer having no data. In this installation, the TBM image setup will clean the entire hard disk and create two drives that is C and D drive, with C drive as the active primary partition. In this case, it will delete all the existing data and OS. Therefore, this type of installation must be used exclusively on newly acquired PC.
20.1.1.2. Upgrade/Re-installation It is kind of an upgrade installation in which the analyzer PC already has some operating system (for example: Windows XP, Windows 7 or previous TBM image) installed. In this case, the TBM image setup will only format the C: drive and install the TBM image on the same. This type of installation must be used if you want to install TBM image on C: drive but want to keep the data on other drives untouched.
20.1.2. Installing TBM Image into Analyzer PC NOTE: The installation procedure should be performed by the trained service engineer. Improper installation may result in loss of data. Before we start installing the TBM image, you must verify that the analyzer PC allows booting from DVD by checking the boot options. To check the boot options:
20-1
Service Manual
XL-200
1. Restart the PC and continuously press F12 (or key that is mentioned on the screen to go to boot menu) to go to boot menu. Select system setup in the boot menu to find all the options for the system setup. 2. Find the boot sequence option in the system setup and make sure that the sequence of boot for CD-ROM is higher than hard drive. 3. If any changes are made to the existing sequence, click Apply to save the changes and restart the PC.
20.1.2.1. Installing TBM image - New (Clean Installation) Caution: In this installation, all the existing data on target computer will be deleted and clean installation of TBM image will be performed. Use the following steps to install the TBM image available on DVD to the analyzer PC: 1. Insert the DVD containing TBM image setup into the DVD drive and restart the PC. 2. It will show a message “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD”. As suggested, press any key so as to boot from the DVD we entered. 3. Now, the PC will boot from the DVD containing TBM image. It will show the Loading Windows... progress bar message on the screen. 4. After loading windows, wait till it shows command prompt window i.e. X:\Windows\System32>. 5. Now, you need to get to the DVD and existing OS drive letter so that we can start the TBM setup. (Refer section 20.1.3 Identifying Various Drives for details on finding the DVD and OS drive letter on the analyzer PC. Note down DVD drive letter and Drive on which you want to install TBM image of OS). 6. Type the appropriate DVD drive letter followed by colon ‘:’ to enter into the DVD drive. For example, if E is the DVD drive letter then type the following command and press Enter key. X:\Windows\System32> E: 7. Now, type the following command in the command prompt window and press Enter key. TBMSetupWithClean Caution: This will delete all the data from the PC. A message will be asked to confirm the TBM image installation.
20-2
Service Manual
XL-200
Type y for yes to continue with the installation or type n to cancel the installation. On clicking n, the installation will be canceled and the command prompt will be displayed. 8. After confirmation, it will clean the entire hard disk and then create two partitions i.e. C and D drive with C drive size as 35 GB approximately, and the remaining as D drive. It will then start applying the TBM image on the PC. This process may take few minutes depending on the configuration of PC. 9. Once the installation of TBM image is completed, a confirmation message for the same will be provided on the screen and then the target computer will restart automatically as shown below.
20-3
Service Manual
XL-200
10. After restart, it might again ask to boot from DVD. Do not press any key and let the PC continue to load the windows automatically. It is ok to take the boot DVD out. 11. It will apply the required settings and may boot again. 12. Finally, it will ask to enter the product key. Enter the product key and click Next button. 13. Follow and accept the remaining instructions to complete the TBM image setup on the target computer. NOTE: TBM setup image contains driver for specific hardware configuration, especially for Network Interface and Display. If the analyzer PC has different hardware components, you may need to install the corresponding drivers from the PC’s motherboard utility CD.
20.1.2.2. Installing TBM image - Upgrade/Reinstall Use the following steps to install the TBM image available on DVD to the analyzer PC: 1. Insert the DVD containing TBM image setup into the DVD drive and then restart the computer. 2. It will show a message “Press any key to boot from CD or DVD”. As suggested, press any key so as to boot from the DVD we entered. 3. Now, the PC will boot from the DVD containing TBM image. It will show the Loading Windows... Progress bar message on the screen. 4. After loading windows, wait till it shows command prompt window that is X:\Windows\System32>. 5. Now, you need to get to the DVD and existing OS drive letter so that we can start the TBM setup. (Refer section 20.1.3 Identifying Various Drives for details on finding the DVD and OS drive letter on the analyzer PC. Note down DVD drive letter and Drive on which you want to install TBM image of OS) 6. Type the appropriate drive letter followed by colon ‘:’ to enter into the DVD drive. For example, if E is the DVD drive letter then type the following command and press Enter key X:\Windows\System32> E: Caution: Be absolutely sure about the drive where you want to install the TBM Image. Next step will format the provided drive and all data on that drive will be lost.
20-4
Service Manual
XL-200
7. Now, type the following command in the command prompt window and press Enter key. TBMSetup A message will be asked to type the OS drive letter followed by colon. For example, if C is the OS drive letter then type C: in the command prompt and press Enter key. If you do not want to continue with the installation then type exit and press Enter key. After drive letter is entered in the command prompt, it will ask to confirm the TBM image installation on the specified drive, type y for yes in the command prompt to continue with the installation. If you do not want to continue with the installation type n to exit and return to command prompt. The same has been shown in the figure.
8. This will format the drive that was provided in step above and then start installing the TBM image on the PC. This process may take few minutes depending on the configuration of analyzer PC. 9. Once the installation of TBM image is completed, a confirmation message for the same will be provided on the screen and then the analyzer PC will restart automatically as shown below.
20-5
Service Manual
XL-200
10. It might again ask to boot from DVD. Do not press any key and let the PC continue to load the windows automatically. It is ok to take the boot DVD out. 11. It will apply the required settings and may boot again. 12. Finally, it will ask to enter the product key. Enter the product key and click Next button. 13. Follow and accept the remaining instructions to complete the TBM image setup on the target computer. NOTE: 1. In the upgrade installation scenario, if the previous installation is Windows 7, it is possible that after installing TBM image, it will show one extra volume which was the hidden partition in previously installed Windows 7 OS. The typical size of this partition or volume is normally 100 to 200 MB. 2. TBM setup image contains driver for specific hardware configuration, especially for Network Interface and Display. If the analyzer PC has different hardware components, you may need to install the corresponding drivers from the PC’s motherboard utility CD.
20.1.3. Identifying Various Drives Use the following steps to find the DVD/OS drive letter from the command prompt on the analyzer PC:
20-6
Service Manual
XL-200
20.1.3.1. Finding the DVD Drive Letter Use the following steps to find the drive letter pertaining to DVD drive. You can skip the steps (1 to 3) if already done: 1. Boot the PC from the DVD containing the TBM image. 2. Now, the PC will boot from DVD containing TBM image. It will show the Loading Windows... Progress bar message on the screen. 3. After loading windows, wait till it shows command prompt window i.e. X:\Windows\System32>. 4. To know the DVD drive letter, just type notepad in the command prompt window. It will open the Notepad window. Click on the Save option from the file menu and then click on the Computer tab on the left to view all the drives information on the right for the analyzer PC. Note the drive letter for the DVD drive. For example, if it is showing CD Drive (E :) or DVD Drive (E :) then, it means that the drive letter is E. 5. Note down the drive letter.
The following figure shows the graphical representation of the same.
6. Cancel and Close the Notepad window after confirming the DVD
drive letter.
20-7
Service Manual
XL-200
20.1.3.2. Finding the Existing Operating System (OS) Drive Letter Use the following steps to find the drive letter pertaining to DVD drive. You can skip the steps (1 to 3) if already done: 1. Boot the PC from the DVD containing the TBM image 2. Now, the PC will boot from DVD containing TBM image. It will show the Loading Windows... Progress bar message on the screen. 3. After loading windows, wait till it shows command prompt window i.e. X:\Windows\System32>. 4. To know the DVD drive letter, just type notepad in the command prompt window. It will open the Notepad window. Click on the Save option from the file menu and then click on the Computer tab on the left to view all the drives information on the right for the analyzer PC. Browse each drive to find the following folders:
Program Files Windows NOTE: 1. Generally these folders are expected to be in OS drive. However, you will find these folders in multiple drives in case the target computer has multiple operating systems. 2. These folders will not be available on a clean PC. 5. Note the drive letter containing the above folders because these folders are expected to be in OS drive. 6. Note down the drive letter. The following figure shows the graphical representation of the same.
20-8
Service Manual
XL-200
7. Cancel and Close the Notepad window after confirming the DVD drive letter.
20.2. Troubleshooting System error “Operating System error 5 (Access denied)” during
installation
Refer section 20.2.1 SQL Server 2005 Configuration for detail. Unable to install MultiXL
Installer will not proceed with the MultiXL installation until user Uninstall Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine (MSDE) from Control Panel > Add / Remove Program. Incase, if it is already installed then the following screen will appear (for Windows XP operating system only).
20-9
Service Manual
XL-200
For Windows 7 operating system, the following screen may appear. Please click on Run Program button to continue with the MultiXL Installation.
Please refer Migration Guide for Database Engine MSDE to SQL Server Express 2005 from the Installation CD.
20.2.1. SQL Server 2005 Configuration Use the following procedure if you are getting “Operating System error 5 (Access denied)” during Create Database operation or Backup operation in MultiXL /Database Utility. 1. Click on Start > Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2005 > Configuration Tools > SQL Server 2005 Manger.
20-10
Service Manual
XL-200
2. In the right panel, select SQL Server (SQLEXPRESS) and choose Properties option. The following screen will be displayed.
3. Change Built -In Account setting by choosing Local System from highlighted drop down box. 4. Click on Apply button. This will display confirmation message for the Account Change. Click on YES and wait for few minutes. This will restart the SQL Server Services.
20-11
Service Manual
XL-200
5. After applying the setting “Apply” button will be disabled. Then close all the windows and continue with MultiXL or Database Utility.
20-12
Service Manual
XL-200
21. Revision History Revision
Date
Revision Description
Author
2010.01
13-January2011
Final release
Sarang Dumbre
2012.01
19-March-2012
Update as per latest hardware & software (version 2012.02) changes. Modified following sections:
Prasad Patil
Inspection and Accessories Checklist Software Installation Procedure Functional Description Electronic Circuit Description Electrical Wiring Description Mechanical Description Maintenance Menu Service Check ISE Module 2013.01
01-April-2013
Service manual has been updated with hardware & software (version 2013.01):
Updated Software installation procedure
Dilution Calibration factor in Service Check screen
RCT parking
Auto wash in maintenance
Updated Electronic and Electrical Wiring Diagrams.
Updated images of Hydraulic section
Introduced section wise page numbering
Accessories checklist updated.
Bubble removal procedure
TBM Image Installation procedure
Diagnosis backup feature
Updated Spare part list
21-1
Sarang Dumbre
Contact Us We welcome your feedback about the product. You can reach us at the following. Address Phone Fax
Erba Diagnostics Mannheim Gmbh, Mallaustrasse 69 - 73, 68219 Mannheim, Germany 49-621-8799770 49-621-8799688
Website Email
www.erbamannheim.com [email protected]
Erba Diagnostics Mannheim GmbH, Mallaustrasse 69 - 73, 68219 Mannheim, Germany
